JP2014023647A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent visibility of information from being deteriorated depending on the display mode of a display device placed in a position overlapping other display means for displaying information related to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes rendering display means for displaying a predetermined rendering in which a partial specific area is placed in a position overlapping the identification information on a front surface side of variable display means that derives and displays a display result by variably displaying plural kinds of identification information each of which is identifiable. The identification information is visible through the specific areas in the rendering display means. The rendering display means controls execution of rendering display in the specific areas at least when variable display is conducted by the variable display means.

Description

  According to the present invention, identification information is displayed on variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and deriving and displaying a display result based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived as the display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player (specifically, a state in which a gaming machine is controlled).

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display result (big win symbol) determined in advance as a variable display display result of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. Is displayed, a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) occurs. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In addition, as a related technique, a display sheet and a light guide plate are used as a display device for production, and two sets of light emitting display devices that illuminate and display a pattern formed on the display sheet by irradiating the light guide plate are stacked. In addition, a slot machine has been proposed in which the pattern formed on one or both display sheets is displayed by emitting light by controlling the irradiation of each light emitting display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-39390 A

  However, like a slot machine described in Patent Document 1, a display device displays information related to a game in a configuration in which a plurality of display devices are arranged in a stacked manner and both display modes can be changed. In the case where it is arranged at a position overlapping other display means, the visibility of the information may be deteriorated depending on the display mode of the display device, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

  Therefore, the present invention prevents the visibility of the information from being deteriorated by the display mode of the display device when the display device is arranged at a position overlapping with other display means for displaying information related to the game. With the goal.

(Means 1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the gaming area. Based on this, variable display means (for example, the first special symbol) that variably displays each of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol) that can identify each of the identification information. It is advantageous for the player when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) predetermined as the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed on the display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the effect display device 9). An effect display for controlling to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state), wherein at least a part of the specific region is arranged at a position overlapping the identification information on the front side of the variable display means, and performs a predetermined effect display means( For example, a front light guide plate 505a and a rear light guide plate 505b) are provided, and the identification information is visible through a specific area in the effect display means (see FIGS. 1 and 66), and the effect display means is at least variable. When the variable display is performed by the display means, the execution of the effect display in the specific area is restricted (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control for restricting the light guide plate effect in step S8105E or step S1911). It is characterized by.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect display means without hindering the visual recognition of the identification information.

(Means 2) An operation instruction display means for performing an operation instruction display for prompting a predetermined operation in the means 1 (for example, a character “aiming right” shown in FIG. 67) when a predetermined condition is established. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the operation instruction effect in step S804 or step S805) and at least a part of the specific area on the front side of the operation instruction display unit is arranged at a position overlapping the operation instruction display unit. An effect display means for performing a predetermined effect display, the operation instruction display means is visible through a specific area of the effect display means, and the effect display means is an operation instruction display at least by the operation instruction display means. Execution of the effect display in the specific area is restricted (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines in step S1911). Performs control for limiting the effect light guide plate Te part: see FIG. 67) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect display means without hindering the visual recognition of the operation instruction display, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged without noticing the operation instruction. it can.

(Means 3) An abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality that occurs during the control of the gaming machine in the means 1 or means 2 (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 560 performs the processing of steps S21a, S21b, and S12101B to S12102B) When the occurrence of an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, an abnormality display unit that displays an abnormality indicating that an abnormality has occurred (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the processes of steps S685 and S689. Part) and at least a part of the specific area on the front side of the abnormality display means is arranged at a position overlapping the abnormality display means, and an effect display means for performing a predetermined effect display. It is possible to see through the specific area, and the effect display means performs an abnormal display at least by the abnormal display means. When and limits the effect execution of the display in a specific area (for example, a microcomputer 100 for the effect control portion performs the processing of steps S687 and S691) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect display means without hindering the visual recognition of the abnormal display.

(Means 4) Before any variable display of the identification information is started in any one of the means 1 to 3, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result based on the hold information. A pre-start determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S1217A and S1217B in the game control microcomputer 560) and a determination result of the pre-start determination means, for example, a specific timing (for example, a timing at which a start prize is generated) The predetermined notice effect (for example, the hold notice effect) is executed in the variable display that is started before the variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination is executed at the timing of digesting the hold memory and shifting the hold display). Predetermined notice effect execution means (for example, steps S6011, S6012 in the effect control microcomputer 100) Execution part) and a notice effect execution means (for example, a microcomputer for effect control) for executing a notice effect (for example, a predetermined effect, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect blade accessory notice effect). 100, a part for executing the predetermined effect process in step S800A and a part for executing step S8105 according to the process data corresponding to the notice effect selected in step S8004). When a specific notice effect (for example, a predetermined effect or a movable object notice effect) among the notice effects is being executed while the identification information is variably displayed by the notice effect executing means, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is restricted (for example, When the result control microcomputer 100 is Y in step S6000, In step S6005, for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control does not shift to the processing after step S6008, without ending the hold notice effect processing (1) without shifting to the processing after step S6001. It may be configured such that the hold notice effect is not started.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the predetermined notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the variable information display result of the identification information is determined as the specific display result based on the hold information read from the hold storage means when the variable display of the identification information is started. Based on the determination result of the start time determining means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to perform the variable display of the identification information Variable display executing means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of steps S301 to S304) and the hold information newly stored in the hold storage means after the game medium passes through the start area, A pre-start determination procedure for determining whether the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information is the specific display result before determination by the start time determination means. (For example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S1217A) and before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means determined by the pre-start determination means is executed, Based on the determination result by the pre-start determining means, the notice effect (for example, the continuous effect) is different so that the ratio of the specific display result differs depending on the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means at the start of the notice effect. ) For executing the notice effect execution (for example, the part in which the effect control microcomputer 1000 executes the continuous effect determined in the effect production process in the effect production process in step S8002C). In the notice effect executing means, the hold information for executing the notice effect by the notice effect executing means is stored in the hold storage means. After (after the storage of the super reach subject to the continuous notice is stored and the execution of the continuous notice is decided), the hold information stored in the hold storage means by the timing of executing the notice effect When the number increases, the notice effect may not be executed (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 is No in step S8002B, the step S8002C is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of hold information at the time when the notice effect is started instead of the number of notice effects, and according to the number of hold information viewed from the player. It is possible to avoid that the expected level that is the specific display result is not consistent with the expected level that is the specific display result set in advance in the gaming machine.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the variable information display result of the identification information is determined as the specific display result based on the hold information read from the hold storage means when the variable display of the identification information is started. Based on the determination result of the start time determining means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to perform the variable display of the identification information Variable display executing means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of steps S301 to S304) and the hold information newly stored in the hold storage means after the game medium passes through the start area, A pre-start determination procedure for determining whether the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information is the specific display result before determination by the start time determination means. (For example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S1217A) and before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means determined by the pre-start determination means is executed, Based on the determination result by the pre-start determining means, the notice effect (for example, the continuous effect) is different so that the ratio of the specific display result differs depending on the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means at the start of the notice effect. ) For executing the notice effect (for example, the portion in which the effect control microcomputer 1000 executes the continuous effect determined in the effect setting process in the effect control process is executed in step S8002C), and the notice effect. After the hold information for executing the notice effect by the execution means is stored in the hold storage means (subject to continuous notice) When the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold storage means is increased up to the timing of executing the notice effect (after step S8002B, for example, in step S8002B) When the determination result is No, execution of the determined notice effect or a timing for executing the notice effect is corrected (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 performs the processing of steps S8002F to S8002J). It may be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of hold information at the time when the notice effect is started, not the number of notice effects, and the notice effect after the execution of the notice effect is decided. When the number of hold information increases before the start of the game, the execution of the determined notice effect or the timing for executing the notice effect is corrected, so the specific display result according to the number of hold information seen by the player It can be avoided that the expected degree of becoming inconsistent with the expected degree that is the specific display result set in advance in the gaming machine.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is set as the specific display result based on the hold information read from the hold storage means when the variable display of the identification information is started. Based on the determination result of the start time determining means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to perform the variable display of the identification information Variable display executing means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of steps S301 to S304) and the hold information newly stored in the hold storage means after the game medium passes through the start area, A pre-start determination procedure for determining whether the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information is the specific display result before determination by the start time determination means. (For example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S1217A) and before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means determined by the pre-start determination means is executed. Based on the determination result by the determination unit before the start of the notice effect, the ratio of the specific display result varies depending on the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means at the start of the notice effect, Preliminary effect determining means determined when variable display of identification information is started (for example, the portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the continuous effect setting process in step S8002K) and the advance notice determined by the predictive effect determining means. A notice effect execution means (for example, a performance) that executes the effect at a predetermined timing in the variable display for which the determination has been made. The control microcomputer 100, portions implementing the steps S8002C) and may be configured to include.
According to such a configuration, since the reliability changes according to the number of pieces of hold information at the time when the notice effect is started, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the point when the notice effect is started.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the display unit from diagonally forward, (b) is a perspective view which shows the state seen from diagonally back. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. (A) is a front light-guide plate, (b) is a rear light-guide plate, (c) is a principal part enlarged view which shows a dot pattern, (d) is an expanded sectional view which shows a dot pattern. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of an upper frame. (A) is a top view of a condensing lens, (b) is a front view of a condensing lens, (c) is AA sectional drawing of (a), (d) is BB sectional drawing of (a). is there. (A) is a principal part enlarged plan view which shows an upper frame, (b) is CC sectional drawing of (a), (c) is DD sectional drawing of (a). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a display unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of FIG. It is EE sectional drawing of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold notice effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold notice effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation notice effect process (2). It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display return process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the table for continuous production execution determination. It is a figure which shows the table for notice productions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a figure which shows the case where a continuous effect and a notice effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the case where only a notice effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a part of continuous production | presentation setting process in a modification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between each special figure pending | holding memory | storage number and jackpot expectation degree in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production | presentation setting process.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  A display unit 550 is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display unit 550 is provided with an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper left part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the 4th symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol change according to the effect mode. Even in cases, it is always visible.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red.Note that the display color varies depending on the type of big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, or 2R probability variation big hit) When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of loss and red in the case of the big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is 5R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit). The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed. In addition, for example, when one LED is lit, it indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed. Also good. In addition, for example, when one full color LED is used, when the red light is lit, it indicates that the big hit symbol is stopped and when the blue light is lit, the big hit symbol is not stopped. May be expressed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  In addition, a predetermined effect execution area 9 </ b> F for executing a predetermined effect described later is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A right side of the game board 6 is provided with a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided in the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  In addition, a variable winning ball apparatus having a second starting winning port 14 on which a game ball can be won is placed on the right side of the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13 (the lower right side of the effect display device 9). 15 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising two displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. Yes. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown. However, the sum is the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays a pending | holding memory | storage number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Moreover, when comprised in that way, while a 1st hold | maintenance memory and a 2nd hold | maintenance memory are displayed side by side in order of winning to the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14, in the total holding storage display part, So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the left side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, with the exception of the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. .

  At the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). Note that the stick controller 122 can be operated by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button capable of a predetermined instruction operation is provided. Further, for example, a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like is built in the operation rod of the stick controller 122. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided, for example, inside the lower pan body in the lower part of the stick controller 122. In addition, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate, for example.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is always shifted to the probability change state. However, when the big hit is made, the game may be shifted to a so-called short-time state in addition to the probability change state. A machine may be configured. In this case, the high base state may be shifted even in the short time state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9, whereas the second start winning port 14 is located on the lower right side of the effect display device 9. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state (for example, a normal state), a game ball is shot on the route indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 1 in order to win the first start winning port 13. Is desirable.

  On the other hand, in the case of the above-described high base state, for example, the frequency that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state as compared with the case where the high base state is not. For example, the start-up prize is easier to enter the second start prize opening 14 than the first start prize opening 13. Therefore, in the high base state, it is desirable to launch a game ball on the route indicated by arrow B instead of the route indicated by arrow A in FIG. 1 in order to win the second start winning opening 14. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the route indicated by the arrow B is referred to as right-handed. In this embodiment, in the high base state, for example, an operation instruction effect for displaying an image for instructing a right-hand shot on the effect display device 9 is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a big prize opening is provided on the lower right side of the effect display device 9, and the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state). As a result, the large winning opening which becomes the winning area is opened. Accordingly, since it is desirable to launch a game ball on the route indicated by the arrow B even in the big hit game state, for example, an operation instruction effect is displayed in which an image indicating a right strike is displayed on the effect display device 9. As described above, the operation instruction effect is performed in the high base state or the big hit game state, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

  Next, the structure of the display unit 550 will be described. 2A is a perspective view showing a state in which the display unit is viewed obliquely from the front side, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view showing a state in which the display unit is viewed from the diagonally rear side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. 4A is a front light guide plate, FIG. 4B is a rear light guide plate, FIG. 4C is an enlarged view of a main part showing a dot pattern, and FIG. 4D is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the dot pattern. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the upper frame. 6A is a plan view of the condenser lens, FIG. 6B is a front view of the condenser lens, FIG. 6C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 6A, and FIG. It is B sectional drawing. 7A is an enlarged plan view of a main part showing the upper frame, FIG. 7B is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 7A, and FIG. 7C is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal sectional view showing the display unit. FIG. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part of FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG.

  In the following description, the vertical and horizontal directions will be described with reference to the case where the display unit 550 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the display unit 550 includes an effect display device 9 and a display device 500 arranged on the front side of the effect display device 9 in an integrated manner. The effect display device 9 is attached to the front surface of an attachment member 502 provided with attachment brackets 501a and 501b for attachment to the gaming machine 1 on the left and right sides. The display device 500 is disposed so as to cover the front side of the display area of the effect display device 9, and is attached to the mounting member 502 via locking claws 503a to 503c that project from the upper side and the lower side toward the back side. It is locked to.

  The display device 500 includes a light guide plate 505 including a front light guide plate 505a and a rear light guide plate 505b having translucency that can transmit light, and a display as a light emitter that is provided so that light can enter the end surface of the light guide plate 505. LEDs 62a and 62b (see FIG. 5) and display LEDs 62a and 62b which are provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 505 in a manner representing predetermined display information (see FIG. 4) and are incident on the inside from the end face of the light guide plate 505. Are disposed between the light guide plate 505 and the display LEDs 62a, 62b, and the display LEDs 62a, 62b. The front lens 507a and the rear lens 5 that condense the incident light from 62b toward the light guide plate 505 while condensing it in the thickness direction and emitting it toward the end face of the light guide plate 505. A condenser lens 507 consisting of 7b (see FIG. 5), a frame frame 504 formed into a square frame shape by a synthetic resin material having a non-translucent, are mainly composed.

  The frame body 504 is formed in a square frame shape by a left frame 504a and a right frame 504b, a lower frame 504c connecting the lower ends of the left frame 504a and the right frame 504b, and an upper frame 504d connecting the upper ends. ing. The left frame 504a, the right frame 504b, and the lower frame 504c are integrally formed in an upward U-shape, and the upper frame 504d is detachably attached to the upper ends of the left frame 504a and the right frame 504b with screws N1, and the upper side Is provided to be openable.

  An insertion groove 508a into which the front light guide plate 505a is inserted and an insertion groove 508b into which the rear light guide plate 505b is inserted are continuously formed in the inner surface of the left frame 504a, the right frame 504b, and the lower frame 504c. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the light guide plate 505 can be inserted into the insertion grooves 508a and 508b from above and removed upward by removing the upper frame 504d as shown in FIG.

  Since the light guide plate 505 is detachably provided from the left frame 504a, the right frame 504b, and the lower frame 504c as described above, the light guide plate 505 can be easily replaced. When exchanging to another light guide plate 505 having different information, only the light guide plate 505 can be easily replaced.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front by a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension L3 {plate thickness (for example, 5 mm)}. Is formed. The light guide plate 505 is not necessarily transparent as long as it has translucency. For example, the light guide plate 505 may be colored or translucent.

  Reflecting portions 510a to 510c are formed on the back surface 505B of the front light guide plate 505a to reflect the light from the display LED 62a and emit the light from the front surface 505F (see FIG. 4A). The reflective portion 510a is formed to represent the characters “Large”, the reflective portion 510b is represented as “Hi”, and the reflective portion 510c is represented as “Li”. The left region, the middle region, and the right region obtained by dividing the front surface 505F into three equal parts in the horizontal direction. It is arranged to fit in each.

  Reflecting portions 511a to 511i are formed on the back surface 505B of the rear light guide plate 505b to reflect the light from the display LED 62b and emit the light from the front surface 505F (see FIG. 4B). The reflection part 511a is formed to have a character having a drum, the reflection part 511b has a character “BONUS GET!”, The reflection part 511c is formed to represent a girl character, and the front area 505F is divided into three equal parts in the left-right direction. Are arranged so as to fit in each of the right regions. Moreover, the reflection parts 511d-511i are formed so that the circumference | surroundings of 511a-511c may be enclosed.

  Therefore, these reflection portions 510a and 511a, 510b and 511b, 510c and 511c are arranged at positions where the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are overlapped in the front-rear direction with the frame frame body 504 inserted.

  As shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D, these reflecting portions 510a to 510c and 511a to 511i have a substantially triangular wave shape in which the sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided through the light guide plate 505 has a constant pitch. It is formed in an uneven state (rough surface). Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface 505B of the light guide plate 505 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an acrylic plate, You may comprise a reflection part by the sticking dot system which affixed the reflecting plate with the dot-shaped adhesive material, a groove processing system, etc.

  In the present embodiment, the reflection portions 510a to 510c and 511a to 511i on the back surface 505B of the light guide plate 505 are uneven portions having a substantially triangular wave shape in a sectional view in the light traveling direction, but the present invention is limited to this. The reflecting portions 510a to 510c and 511a to 511c can be variously modified as long as they constitute a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front surface 505F. In FIGS. 4A and 4B, the reflective portions 510a to 510c and 511a to 511i are represented as characters or designs surrounded by a frame line. A character and a picture are formed by the gathering.

  In this embodiment, characters and pictures are exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 505. In addition to these, other display information including decorations such as symbols, patterns, or patterns is also included. Display may be possible. Hereinafter, an effect of displaying characters and designs by the light guide plate 505 is referred to as a light guide plate effect. The light guide plate effect is executed at any timing during special symbol fluctuations, for example, during super reach, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, during the big hit gaming state, during the high base state after the big hit game, etc. .

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the upper frame 504c is formed with a pair of front and rear lens grooves 512a and 512b extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the up-down direction. The lens grooves 512a and 512b are arranged side by side with a central wall portion 513 therebetween, and are formed in a tapered shape so that the front and rear width dimension gradually decreases from the upper side to the lower side. In addition, a pair of front and rear locking claws 517a and 517b facing the lens grooves 512a and 512b are provided at the left and right ends of the wall portion 513, and the condensing lens 507 fitted in the lens grooves 512a and 512b is provided. The upper end is locked to restrict upward movement.

  In addition, a concave substrate placement portion 515 into which the LED substrate 514 provided with display LEDs 62a and 62b on the lower surface can be fitted is formed in the upper surface opening of the upper frame 504c. By disposing the LED substrate 514 on the substrate disposition portion 515, the display LEDs 62a and 62b are disposed opposite to the upper surface openings of the front and rear lens grooves 512a and 512b, and screws N2 attached to the left and right end portions thereof are screwed. The LED substrate 514 can be fixed by screwing into the holes 516a and 516b.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the front lens 507 a and the rear lens 507 b are formed in a horizontally long plate shape with a light-transmitting synthetic resin material such as acrylic or polycarbonate, and extend along the upper end surface 505 </ b> H of the light guide plate 505. Extending between the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505 and the display LEDs 62a and 62b (see FIG. 10).

  Specifically, a plurality of substantially semicircular convex portions 518 bulging downward in front view are continuously arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction on the lower sides of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b. Each convex portion 518 is formed corresponding to each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b, and the front end surface of each convex portion 518, that is, the lower surface facing the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505 in the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b. The end surface 507L (outgoing surface) constitutes a plurality of curved surfaces (lens surfaces).

  The plurality of convex portions 518 are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with display LEDs, and for example, a plurality of convex portions 518 (lens surfaces) corresponding to two or more LEDs (light emitters) may be provided. Further, although the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b are configured by a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 518, a plurality of display LEDs 62a and 62b arranged in parallel along the upper end surface 505H. Corresponding to the above, a plurality of condensing lenses formed separately from each other may be provided.

  On the upper sides of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b, a plurality of curved bulges 519 that bulge slightly upward in a front view are continuously formed in the longitudinal direction. Each bulging portion 519 is formed corresponding to each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b, and the top surface of each bulging portion 519, that is, the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b is opposed to the display LEDs 62a and 62b. The end surface 507H (incident surface) constitutes a plurality of curved surfaces (lens surfaces). Note that the curved upper end surface 507H has a smaller curvature than the curved lower end surface 507L and is formed so as to swell slightly.

  The front-rear width dimension L1 (plate thickness) of the lowermost portion of the lower end surface 507L of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b is shorter than the front-rear width dimension L2 (plate thickness) of the uppermost portion of the upper end surface 507H. (L1 <L2). The front-rear width dimension L1 of the lower end surface 507L is substantially the same as the front-rear width dimension L3 of the light guide plate 505 (L1≈L3), and the front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H is the light emitting surface of the display LEDs 62a and 62b. The front-rear width dimension L4 of 62c (see FIG. 9) is formed to be approximately the same dimension.

  The front surface 507F forms a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines toward the lower end surface 507L from the upper end surface 507H, and the rear surface 507B has a flat surface that inclines toward the lower front surface from the upper end surface 507H toward the lower end surface 507L. It constitutes a simple inclined surface. That is, since the front surface 507F and the back surface 507B form inclined surfaces that gradually incline toward each other from the upper end surface 507H toward the lower end surface 507L, the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b are arranged from the upper end surface 507H to the lower end surface. It is formed in the shape of a substantially inverted letter C in the longitudinal section in which the plate thickness gradually decreases toward 507L.

  Therefore, the front-rear width dimension (plate thickness) of the lower end surface 507L of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b becomes shorter as it approaches the lowest part of each convex part 518, and the front-rear width dimension L1 becomes the smallest in the lowest part. . In this embodiment, short non-inclined surfaces 507Fa and 507Bb that are parallel to each other are provided between the upper end surface 507H and the inclined surface.

  Hook pieces 520a and 520b are formed at the left and right ends of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b, and are locked from above by ribs (not shown) provided in the upper frame 504d, and in the lens grooves 512a and 512b. Is supposed to be retained.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b thus configured are inserted from above into the front and rear lens grooves 512a and 512b from the upper surface opening of the upper frame 504d. Then, the upper end surface 507H is inserted until it is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper surface openings of the lens grooves 512a and 512b, and the hook pieces 520a and 520b are engaged with ribs (not shown), the lower end surface 507L is A concave groove portion into which the light guide plate 505 is inserted is formed at a position slightly above the lower surface opening of the lens grooves 512a and 512b.

  Actually, when the upper frame 504d is connected between the upper ends of the left frame 504a and the right frame 504b, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are inserted into the lower portions of the lens grooves 512a and 512b. As described above, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are inserted into the lower portions of the lens grooves 512a and 512b, so that the upper end surfaces 505H of the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b and the lower end surfaces of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b. 507L faces the lens grooves 512a and 512b with a predetermined gap therebetween. As described above, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are fitted into the lower portions of the lens grooves 512a and 512b, thereby preventing the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the upper end surface 505H and the lower end surface 507L.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 7C, a space is formed between the lower end surface 507L and the upper end surface 505H because the lower end surface 507L is formed as a curved surface by the convex portion 518. The space is sealed by the non-transparent wall surface of the upper frame 504d constituting the lens grooves 512a and 512b, so that the light emitted from the lower end surface 507L is incident on the upper end surface 505H without leaking to the surroundings. The In addition to the example shown in this embodiment, in order to obtain the same effect, for example, the upper end surface 507H and the upper end surface 505H may be formed to be concave or processed into a knurled shape. .

  As shown in FIG. 8, the display device 500 configured in this way is assembled on the front side of the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 2). In the state assembled on the front side, the frame frame 504 surrounds the display area of the effect display device 9, and the pair of front and rear light guide plates 507 cover the entire display area of the effect display device 9.

  In addition, the rear light guide plate 505b is disposed on the front side with a predetermined gap (for example, about 20 mm) from the display area of the effect display device 9, and the front light guide plate 505a is predetermined with respect to the rear light guide plate 505b. It arrange | positions on the front side through a clearance gap (for example, about 15 mm). The gap width can be changed variously. Further, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b may be arranged in contact with each other.

  In addition, the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 are configured separately and are detachably assembled with each other so that the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 are integrated. Since it can be assembled or removed from the gaming machine 1, not only the workability is improved, but also the relative position between the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 does not shift when assembled to the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the exchange operation of the effect display device 9, the front and rear light guide plates 507, and the display LEDs 62a and 62b can be performed separately in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the display device 500 includes the light guide plate 505, the LED substrate 514, the condenser lens 507, and the like integrated with each other via the frame frame body 504. Therefore, the workability is improved, and the relative positional relationship of each member is changed by the removal by replacement so that the light emission display is not adversely affected.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the display device 500 is arranged on the upper side of the front light guide plate 505 a in a state where the condenser lens 507, the LED substrate 514, and the light guide plate 505 are integrally assembled to the frame frame 504. A front lens 507a is disposed along the front lens 507a. A plurality of display LEDs 62a are arranged in the longitudinal direction above the front lens 507a, and a rear lens 507b is disposed along the upper side of the rear light guide plate 505b. A plurality of display LEDs 62b are juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction above the lens 507b. That is, the condenser lens 507 is disposed between the light guide plate 505 and the display LEDs 62a and 62b.

  Specifically, in the condenser lens 507, the lower end surface 507L faces the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505, and the upper end surface 507H faces the light emitting surface 62c of each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b. In addition, each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the individual upper end surface 507H and lower end surface 507L corresponding to each convex portion 518.

  The front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H and the front-rear width dimension L4 of the light emitting surface 62c are substantially the same (L2≈L4), and there is no deviation in the front-rear direction between the light emitting surface 62c and the upper end surface 507H. Light emitted from the light emitting surface 62c is incident on the upper end surface 507H without being diffused in the front-rear direction. Further, the front-rear width dimension L3 of the upper end surface 505H is substantially the same as the front-rear width dimension L1 near the lowest part of the lower end surface 507L (L3≈L1), and the deviation in the front-rear direction between the upper end surface 505H and the lower end surface 507L is As a result, the light emitted from the lower end surface 507L is incident on the upper end surface 505H without being diffused in the front-rear direction.

  Further, a predetermined gap (for example, about 1 to 3 mm) is provided between the lowermost portion of the lower end surface 507L and the upper end surface 505H and between the upper end surface 507H and the light emitting surface 62c of the display LEDs 62a and 62b. It is done. Thereby, the condensing lens 507 and the light guide plate 505 are prevented from being damaged by vibration generated when the gaming machine is transported or used.

  Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the display LEDs 62a and 62b will be described.

  The outgoing light emitted from each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b enters the upper end surface 507H of the condenser lens 507. Here, since the front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H and the front-rear width dimension L4 of the light emitting surface 62c are substantially the same dimension (L2≈L4), the emitted light from the display LEDs 62a, 62b diffuses in the front-rear direction. Without being incident on the upper end surface 507H. Further, since the left and right width of the upper end surface 507H is longer than the left and right width of the light emitting surface 62c, the light diffused in the left and right direction is substantially incident on the upper end surface 507H.

  Incident light that enters the condenser lens 507 from the upper end surface 507H is guided toward the light guide plate 505 below. Although the LED light has high directivity, the incident light is diffused radially in the left-right direction by being incident through the upper end surface 507H formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface. Similarly, when passing through the lower end surface 507L formed as a curved lens surface, the light is refracted and emitted downward vertically (see FIG. 10).

  As a result, the light emitted from the display LEDs 62a and 62b having high directivity can be diffused radially to some extent in the left and right directions by the condenser lens 507 to widen the light emitting region, and the left and right directions on the lower end surface 507L can be expanded. Since light emitted from different positions is guided vertically downward and does not spread radially, only the vertically downward regions corresponding to the display LEDs 62a and 62b can be caused to partially emit light.

  Further, the incident light that has entered the condenser lens 507 from the upper end surface 507H is guided toward the lower light guide plate 505, and repeatedly undergoes total reflection in the front-rear (plate thickness) direction. (See FIG. 9), and finally exits from the lower end surface 507L having a shorter front-rear width than the upper end surface 507H.

  In this way, the light from the display LEDs 62a and 62b can be collected without being diffused in the front-rear width (plate thickness) direction and guided to the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505, so that attenuation of light is suppressed. . In particular, even when the front-rear width dimension L4 of the light emitting surface 62c of the display LEDs 62a, 62b is larger than the front-rear width dimension L3 of the upper end surface 505H (L4> L3), the light from the display LEDs 62a, 62b is front-rear. Since the light can be guided to the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505 without being diffused in the width (plate thickness) direction, the light from the display LEDs 62a and 62b is prevented from being diffused to the surroundings.

  Although not specifically shown, for example, even when a plurality of display LEDs 62a and 62b are arranged in the front-rear width direction, the front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H is expanded according to the display LEDs 62a and 62b, thereby Without being diffused into the upper end surface 507H. Therefore, even when the front and rear width dimension of the light emitting area of the display LEDs 62a and 62b is larger than the front and rear width dimension L3 (plate thickness) of the light guide plate 505, the light emitted from the display LEDs 62a and 62b is guided in the thickness direction while guiding the emitted light. The light can be condensed and incident on the light guide plate 505.

  The light emitted from the lower end surface 507L enters the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505, and is guided downward while repeating total reflection by the front and rear surfaces. And when it reaches | attains reflection part 510a-510c, 511a-511i, an incident light is reflected toward the front side by the reflective surface formed of the recessed part, and from a player, each reflection part 510a is reflected. The portions corresponding to ˜510c, 511a to 511i are emitted by reflected light, so that display information such as predetermined characters and characters is displayed.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 11 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data that the random number circuit 503 updates. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, the display LED 62a corresponding to the front light guide plate 505a, the display LED 62b corresponding to the rear light guide plate 505b, and the frame side. The display control of the frame LED 28 is performed, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 12 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 (not shown) via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating an effect blade accessory 79 (not shown) via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the display LED 62a corresponding to the front light guide plate 505a, the display LED 62b corresponding to the rear light guide plate 505b, and the like.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area (output) where the output state of the output port is saved Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 gives a display result designation command designating the display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 22). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags that are selectively processed according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach probability sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) is not reached but reached. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an abnormal winning notification process for notifying an abnormal winning when it is detected that a game ball has won a prize winning opening at a time other than the regular time (step S21a). Further, the CPU 56 executes input port data confirmation processing for transmitting the input data of the input port to the effect control microcomputer 100 when a change occurs in the input data of the input port (step S21b).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S27, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is won, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability change big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability change big hit, 10R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden probable big hit that does not involve the high base state only by shifting to the high probability state. . However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of the super reach when the high probability / low base state is set at the time of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. In the case of providing a sudden probability variation jackpot with a high probability / low base state, the probability of all variations display is high until the variation display for the 71st rotation is terminated after the jackpot game with the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated. / Because it is in the state controlled to the low base state, the ratio of super reach becomes high in all the change displays until the probability variation state ends. Therefore, in the case of providing a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, the ratio of the super reach in the high probability / low base state is not necessarily increased every time, but the super reach is achieved. You may make it provide the time of raising a ratio, and the time of not raising (it is a normal ratio). In addition, for example, instead of looking at the gaming state (for example, whether or not a high probability flag or a high base flag is set), the number of variable displays after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st variable display is obtained. Only occasionally you may increase the percentage of superreach. With such a configuration, when a sudden probability change big hit with a high probability / low base state is provided, after reaching the big hit game with the sudden probability change big hit, the super reach of each time until the end of the probability change state is displayed. It is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate is continuously increased.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are shown as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 15, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the re-variation is performed once when the normal PB2-3 is used among the variation patterns which are used when sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and which has a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation per unit, 10R probability variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach And normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 17 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 17 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 17A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and is also changed to a high base state. There are two cases: a state that is only transferred to a state and a state that is not transferred to a high base state (which is a low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a high probability state and a high base state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 71 times. However, after the big hit, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times, and is shifted to the low base state, and only the high probability state is continued until the variable display is ended 71 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit, from the end of the 70th fluctuation display to the end of the 71st fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is transferred. There may be a certain probability change state (which is a low base state).

  FIGS. 17B and 17C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 17B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 17B and 17C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 17A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 17D and 17E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 17D determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 17E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine one of “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, eight determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, a sudden probability variation big hit as a first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value As the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given, 15 rounds of probability variation big hit “15R probability variation big hit”, 10 rounds probability variation big hit “10R probability variation big hit” and 2 rounds probability variation big hit “2R probability variation big hit” may be determined. In addition, there is a case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the game value to be given is shown in this embodiment. The number of rounds is not limited. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, the types of big hits include “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 10 rounds, and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in this implementation. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, every big hit is a probable big hit that shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends, but, for example, after the big hit gaming state ends, it shifts to the high probability state while remaining in the normal state. A normal big hit may not be provided as a big hit type. In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. Instead, for example, five or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than four types, for example, only two types of jackpot types may be provided.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “10R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 10-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, a high probability state and a high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high base The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that allows only two (2 rounds) opening of the big prize opening as in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit” described later. The open time of the big prize opening per round is long (in this embodiment, 29 seconds). Therefore, in the case of “suddenly promising big hit”, which will be described later, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game, but in the case of “2R probable big hit”, the big winning Although the number of times the mouth is opened is small, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big prize mouth during the big hit game.

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the big winning opening is less than “15R probability change big hit” or “10R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice) The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, whereas “sudden probability variation big hit” takes one round. The opening time of the winning jackpot is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a winning prize during the big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the transition is made to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the transition is made to the high probability state and also to the high base state. (See S166 to S169). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability change big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability change big hit, 10R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit). However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of becoming super reach when executing the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game is increased, but suddenly without the small hit and the high base state. When it is configured to provide a probable big hit, when the ratio of super reach is not necessarily increased every time in the 71st fluctuation display, but when the ratio of super reach is increased or not increased (the normal ratio is maintained) And a variation pattern may be selected with the same selection ratio / selection method as in the low probability / low base state in the high probability state after suddenly probable big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of super reach becomes permanently high in the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values that are compared with a random 1 value and correspond to "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", and "sudden probability variation big hit", respectively. Judgment value (big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  18A to 18C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 18A used when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, and the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”. 18B is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 18B in the assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, in this embodiment, when “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” is used, the variation pattern type determination is performed. If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 10R / 2R probability variation jackpot and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is suddenly probable big hit state, the big hit state with 15R probable big hit, 10R probable big hit or 2R probable big hit The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of control.

  FIG. 18D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 19A to 19D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 19A shows the variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 19B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 19C shows a variation pattern for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the probability variation state. A type determination table 135C is shown. FIG. 19D shows a high probability / low base state in which the gaming state is in a probabilistic state (the state from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit). Shows a variation pattern type determination table 135D for loss used in the case of The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off-design. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D, in this embodiment, even when the probability variation state is present, if the last 71st variation display is performed after the big hit, the previous time is displayed. Compared to the case where the 70th variation display is performed, the variation pattern with super reach is selected more frequently. By doing so, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit of the player at the end of the probability variation state is performed by performing the super reach variation display with a high probability in the last variation display where the probability variation state ends. The feeling is heightened. In addition, not only the last 71th variation display, for example, increasing the ratio of super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, 5 times before) to the last variation display, etc. Super reach variation display may be performed with high probability over a plurality of variation displays.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit, the high probability state continues until the 71st variation display ends, and the high base state continues until the 70th variation display ends. Thus, in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the case where the high probability / low base state is controlled is shown, but the high base state is continued until the 71st variation display is completed. In the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the high probability / high base state may be controlled. However, if controlled in this way, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment are selected according to the state of the high probability flag and the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process as described later. (Refer to Steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). However, since the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state remains in the high probability / high base state, the state of the flag is confirmed in this way. It becomes impossible to select the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D. Thus, in the case of controlling to the high probability / high base state even in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter described later are confirmed, If the remaining is once, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is selected. If the counter value is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation is selected. Good.

  Further, when the ratio of the super reach is increased from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last fluctuation display, for example, a high probability number described later at the end of the big hit Set the counter and the high base number counter to 75 times (for example, set both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter to 75, and the high probability / high base state until 75 times of variable display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75 and the high base count counter is set to 70. From the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display, the high probability / low It is also possible to control to the base state.In the case of controlling to the high probability / low base state from the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display. In this case, according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S95, S96, S100, S101))) At the start of the variable display, whether or not the value of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter is within a predetermined number (for example, 5) or not (the remaining number of probability variation states) Is within a predetermined number), and if it is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for detachment with an increased super reach ratio shown in FIG. 19D. If the counter value is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the deviation variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected (the probability change state is ended). For example, the configuration may be configured in such a manner that the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variation display. For example, the counter value for counting the number of variations after the big hit game is 71, for example, In such a case, the shift variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 19C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 19B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo-ream. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 20B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 20B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 15, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small In the case of “hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (A002 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit”, “10R probability variable big hit”, or “2R probability variable big hit” is ended. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning. The command FFYY (H) is an effect control command (input port data designation command) indicating input data of the input port 1. YY indicates input data of the input port 1.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively). Command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the following types of reserved memory Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is increased (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased is specified, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won as the hold storage information (whether the first hold storage or the second hold storage has increased). In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the hold memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the start winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-described variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to (D) and FIGS. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the start winning that it becomes “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether or not 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 18 and 19), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of variation display that is actually executed. For this reason, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3 is selected, a pending notice effect, which will be described later, is provided as a predetermined notice effect for the change display determined at the time of winning. Is executed. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 (specifically, the variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that the “predetermined notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as the predetermined notice effect, a notice effect (a hold notice effect to be described later) that is immediately executed at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be noticed occurs is executed (however, as described later, Even if a new start prize is generated, the hold notice effect is limited, and the hold notice effect may be executed at the timing when the hold memory is consumed and the hold display is shifted).

  In addition, as the predetermined notice effect, the effect is started from the change display that is started after the start winning for the change display to be notified is generated, and a plurality of times before the change display that is the target of the notice effect is started. Notice effect continuously executed over various fluctuation displays (for example, a mode in which chance chances are stopped over a plurality of fluctuation displays and the display screen is flashed (also referred to as “change in fluctuation pattern during symbol fluctuation”) Or a mode in which the mode is changed in such a manner that the background screen crawls over a plurality of variation displays (also referred to as “mode transition”), a mode in which countdown is performed over a plurality of variation displays ( A continuous notice effect) (also referred to as “countdown”) may be executed. However, in this case, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of fluctuating displays. For example, the notice effect is displayed only once in the fluctuating display before the fluctuating display targeted for the notice effect is started. You may do it. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the display over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time. However, regarding the continuous notice effect in the “countdown” mode, if the countdown is only once or intermittent, the effect becomes unnatural, so it is desirable to perform continuously over a plurality of variable displays.

  In this embodiment, a case where a start winning to the first start winning port 13 occurs in the high base state, or a case where a start winning to the first start winning port 13 occurs during the big hit game. Except for this (see steps S1215A and S1216A), a winning determination process is executed each time a start winning is generated, and a symbol designation command shown in FIG. 24 is transmitted and a variable category command shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is transmitted. Is done. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute the hold notice effect to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are used as the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  27 and 28 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 39), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 29 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 30B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 30, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer as reserved storage, but the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is It is not limited to random values. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a high base flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A. If the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a winning presentation effect process is executed to determine in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected winning winning is executed at the time of starting winning (step S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S1220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is not executed, the determination result at the time of winning is set as a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF (H)”) as EXT data. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the process of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed, and there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A and the winning effect processing may be executed in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is in a state in which the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step S12101B). If the high base flag is not set, it is determined that the prize is illegally awarded to the second starting port, the input data of the corresponding input port is updated (step S12102B), and the second starting port switch passing process is terminated. In addition, when the input data of the input port which shows the illegal winning to the 2nd starting port is updated in step S12102B, the input data of the input port was updated by the input port data confirmation process (step S21a) of FIG. Confirmed, and in the effect control command control process (step S28), an input port data designation command indicating an unauthorized winning at the second starting port is transmitted.

  If the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory number for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the counter is 4 (step S1211B). If the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the second start port switch passing process is terminated as it is. If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 30B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing in steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start winning prize is received in the second start winning opening 14 and the winning time effect processing in step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  Also in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the high base state is set. That is, only when the base state is low, the winning effect processing in step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A hold notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the probability variation state is established in step S221 at the time of starting winning, until the actual display of variation based on the starting winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If the 15R probability variation big hit, the 10R probability variation big hit, the 2R probability variation big hit, or the sudden probability variation big hit occurs before, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (the first winning determination table shown in FIG. 17B). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 17C (for the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, a 2R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation may change from a normal state to a probability variation state). Therefore, the gaming state determined at step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is determined.

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 89 or less (ie, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 26). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect process in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. Also, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “10R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “2R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when determining that “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “15R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. The determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number value and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a hold notice effect described later may be executed.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A). finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the second special symbol is displayed with priority, as shown in this embodiment, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 31, the big hit determination random number (random R) Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed and not compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed) However, the processing of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in this order. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares a big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 17) determined in advance with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 17A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 17A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 17A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (71 in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 17B and 17C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “10R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “2R probable big hit” is decided, “3” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “10R probability variation big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R probability variation big hit” is decided, “9” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. . When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 18 (A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 18D as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in Step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 19A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 19B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 19D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, a high probability / high base state is established), and the CPU 56 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 19C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 19C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 19C) used in a high probability / high base state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 19B), a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 19A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 20) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 21) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The value may be directly extracted from the data, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 19) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 19). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not it will be reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to configure so as to perform a hold notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 22) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Specifically, whether or not it is “10R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “2R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is “2R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. When it is neither “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (that is, when “sudden probability variation big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command. This is performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122, which will be described later, for example. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), Control for transmitting a jackpot start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, “2R-probable big hit” or “suddenly promiscuous big hit” is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (big hit type (Data stored in the buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15R probability variation big hit” is 15 times. “10R probability variation big hit” is 10 times. “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit” is displayed. (In this case, twice.) Is set (step S135). In addition, the round time per round in the jackpot game is also set. In this case, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit and the case of 2R probability variation big hit, although the same two times are set as the number of rounds, different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 2R probability change big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Note that 29 seconds is set as the round time even in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 10R probability variation big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and “sudden probability sudden big hit” Is transmitted with a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 71 times) in a high probability number counter for counting the number of times of display of fluctuation in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in a high base number counter for counting the number of times of change display in the high base state (step S169).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, the high probability / high base state is transitioned to after the big hit game ends, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display is terminated 70 times. Then, after the end of the big hit, the transition to the high probability / low base state is made from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display, and when the 71st variation display ends, the gaming state is in the normal state Return to.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit, If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In addition, in the case of a configuration that can be controlled even in the normal symbol variation state with an increased probability of winning the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, the high base flag determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S170).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 22 and 23) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  42 to 46 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designating command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designating command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 47, in the start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value of the total pending storage number (8 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process of FIG. 29, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is shown. When there is a start winning at the winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number) within one timer interruption Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a storage area is provided so that a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command can be stored in association with each other Is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command within one timer interrupt. Thus, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command are stored in this order (in FIG. 47, the commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5). Examples stored are shown).

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 47 is used in the effect symbol variation start process described later at the timing when the effect symbol variation display is started each time the effect symbol variation display is started. In step S6515, the data is deleted sequentially. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the storage area 5 storing the second reserved memory (second reserved memory number addition designation command (C100 (H)) The stored contents of () are stored) are deleted. Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, so that it is stored in the first storage area 1 at the timing when the display of the effect symbol is started next. The contents of the command storage area at the start winning prize are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 47, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 3, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  In this embodiment, the command received at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the command received at the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 are stored in a common start winning command storage area. However, in this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and it is not necessary to manage the winning order. A first start winning command storage area for storing commands received at the time of starting winning and a second starting winning command storage area for storing commands received at the start winning prize to the second start winning opening 14 are separately provided. You may comprise as follows.

  In addition, in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 47, the storage area 2 shows an example in which the command reception cannot be performed normally and the variable category command is missed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 47, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the content of the second storage area where the variable category command is originally stored remains “0000 (H)”. The state is shown.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the command at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 47 is used. Based on the above, the hold notice effect is set in the hold notice effect process (1) (see step S800B) and the hold notice effect process (2) (see steps S660C and S662C). If the specified command, variable category command, and reserved memory count addition specification command) are missed or inconsistent, the hold notice effect will be displayed until the change display of the hold memory corresponding to the command at the start winning prize is exhausted. Limited. In the following description, the period until the stored memory in which a command is missed or inconsistency occurs during the start winning, in which the hold notice effect is restricted, is also referred to as a hold notice restriction period.

  In this embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is completely prohibited with respect to the hold memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent in the start winning prize, or the hold memory that has won the start prize within the hold notice restriction period. However, the present invention is not limited to the case shown in this embodiment. For example, regarding the hold memory that won the start prize within the hold notice limit period, when the hold notice that the hold notice effect was restricted and the hold memory where the inconsistency occurred and the hold notice limit was released and the hold notice limit period was canceled The display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage may be changed to start the hold notice effect retrospectively.

  Also, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, if a predetermined effect is being executed, or if a movable object notice effect is being executed, a super reach effect is In the case where the second hold symbol is being displayed, the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the hold notice effect is not started immediately (in this case, as described later, When the memory is consumed (when the hold display is shifted), the hold notice effect can be started retroactively). In the example shown in FIG. 47, when a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, the second reserved memory is being executed while the predetermined effect is being executed, the movable object notice effect is being executed, the super reach effect is being executed. If the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is not immediately started due to the presence of the second special symbol or the change display of the second special symbol, the storage area corresponding to the hold memory (FIG. 47). In the example shown in FIG. 5, the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area 4) is set to “1” indicating that the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed.

  In this embodiment, “restricting the hold notice effect” means that the hold notice effect is not set at all for the hold memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the hold notice restriction period. And the concept of delaying the start timing of the hold notice effect. Furthermore, the concept of “restricting the hold notice effect” prohibits execution of the hold notice effect retroactively to the hold memory corresponding to the hold display that is already being displayed, It also includes delaying the start timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, when a new command is stored in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information in the storage area in which the new command is stored becomes “1”. Is set. Undetermined information is information indicating that it is still unprocessed in a hold notice effect process (1) (see step S800B) and a hold display return process (see step S8114) described later. The undetermined information is set to “1” when a new command is received, and thereafter, the command is processed in the hold notice effect process (1) (see step S800B), or the hold display return process (see step S8114). ) Is cleared to “0” when the command is processed. In this embodiment, the undetermined information is set to “1” when the symbol designation command is stored in step S652 if there is no missing symbol designation command.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command received when the start prize is generated are also referred to as a start prize command when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, a reserved memory number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also referred to as reserved storage information. In addition, a symbol designation command which is a command indicating whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning effect processing at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 31), a determination result of the big hit type, a determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654). However, if a variable category command or pending memory count addition specification command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored, it will be received before the variable category command within the current timer interrupt. This means that you have missed the symbol designating command. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and the undetermined information of the storage area. Is set to “1”.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the storage area (step S656A). However, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) has already been stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored. In this case, it means that both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to be received prior to the first reserved memory number addition designation command have been missed within the current timer interrupt. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first reserved storage number addition designation command in the first storage area that is free in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step S656B).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the storage area (step S658A). However, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) has already been stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored. In this case, it means that both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to be received prior to the second reserved memory number addition designation command have been missed within the current timer interrupt. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second reserved memory number addition designation command in the first storage area that is free in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S658B).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S659), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S660A). Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c, shifts the remaining first hold display after the deleted first hold storage one by one, The first reserved memory number display in the one reserved memory display unit 18c is updated (step S660B). For example, when the 1st to 3rd 1st hold display of the 1st hold memory display part 18c is lit-up display, when the 1st hold memory number subtraction designation command is received, the 1st 1st hold display While erasing the first hold display, the first hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the first hold display displayed in the third is displayed in the second display area. Shift to. Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect process (2) (step S660C).

  In this embodiment, when a hold notice effect is executed, a newly displayed hold display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode at a timing when a new start win occurs and a command at the start win is received. When the hold notice effect is immediately started, and after the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, the display mode of the hold display whose determination is postponed at the timing when the hold memory is digested (hold display is shifted) is usually set. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode different from the mode and the hold notice effect is started retrospectively. In this embodiment, the process of determining and starting the hold notice effect at the timing when a new start prize is generated is referred to as the hold notice effect (1) (see step S800B), and the reserved memory is used (the hold display is shifted). The process of determining and starting the hold notice effect at the timing to perform is referred to as hold notice effect (2) (see steps S660C and S662C).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S662A). Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one second on-hold display in the second on-hold storage display unit 18d, shifts the remaining second on-hold display after the erased second on-hold storage one by one, The second reserved memory number display in the two reserved memory display section 9a is updated (step S662B). For example, when the first to third first hold display of the second hold storage display unit 18d is lit up and the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is received (this embodiment) Then, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, if there is at least one second reserved memory, the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received.) The first second reserved display Is deleted, the second hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the second hold display displayed in the third is shifted to the second display area. . Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect process (2) (step S662C).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the effect control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, since the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both 0 and the variable display is not executed, it is stored. The first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are reset. By executing the process of step S665, the first control memory number or the second reservation memory erroneously generated by the addition or subtraction omission of the first reservation memory number or the second reservation memory number occurs in the production control microcomputer 100. Even in a state where the number is recognized, it is possible to reset the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number to return to the normal state by interrupting the reserved memory.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). In this embodiment, controlling the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background screen corresponding to the normal state is also referred to as effect mode A control. Next, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the high probability / high base state. The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen with a red display color) (step S670). In this embodiment, controlling the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state is also referred to as effect mode B. Next, the production control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag and a high base state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, , An orange display color background screen) (step S673). In this embodiment, controlling the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background screen corresponding to the probability change state is also referred to as effect mode C control. Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the high probability state flag (step S674) and resets the high base state flag (step S675).

  In this embodiment, the display position of the fourth symbol (fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d) differs with the display color of the background screen according to the effect mode. Specifically, the display position of the 4th symbol differs between the case of the production mode A or C and the case of the production mode B (details will be described later). In this embodiment, control is performed so that the display position of the fourth symbol is different in the case of effect mode A or C and in the case of effect mode B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The case may be controlled differently in the case of the effect mode B or C, or may be controlled differently depending on the effect mode.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S679). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command received in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big winning opening (step S682). Also, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command opening storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal winning notification designation command (step S684), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal winning notification flag and executes an abnormal winning notification effect (step S685). The effect control CPU 101 performs, for example, an abnormal winning notification effect that causes the effect display device 9 to display an image indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred. Further, when the control for effecting the CPU 101 irradiates the rear light guide plate 505b to emit and display a pattern (for example, FIG. 4B) (Y in step S686), the effect control CPU 101 controls the front light guide plate 505a. The control is switched to the control of emitting and displaying the pattern (for example, FIG. 4A) formed on the display sheet by irradiation (step S687). As described above, when the abnormal winning notification effect is executed, the rear light guide plate 505b is controlled so as to switch the light guide plate to be irradiated from the rear light guide plate 505b to the front light guide plate 505a in which the area of the picture to be displayed is smaller than the rear light guide plate 505b. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an abnormal winning notification effect (for example, an image indicating that an abnormal winning displayed on the effect display device 9 has occurred) from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

  If the received effect control command is an input port data designation command (step S688), the effect control CPU 101 sets an input port data reception flag and displays a notification effect corresponding to the input data of the input port indicated by the command. It executes (step S689). Specifically, in steps S12102A to S12102B of FIG. 29, when the input data of the input port is updated because it is determined that the second start opening is illegal, the presentation control CPU 101 receives the received input port data. In accordance with the designation command, for example, a notification effect is displayed for causing the effect display device 9 to display an image indicating that an illegal winning at the second start opening has occurred. Further, when the control for effecting the CPU 101 irradiates the rear light guide plate 505b to emit and display a pattern (for example, FIG. 4B) (Y in step S690), the effect control CPU 101 controls the front light guide plate 505a. The control is switched to the control of emitting and displaying the pattern (for example, FIG. 4A) formed on the display sheet by irradiation (step S687). As described above, when the notification effect is executed, the rear light guide plate 505b is controlled so as to switch the light guide plate to be irradiated from the rear light guide plate 505b to the front light guide plate 505a having a smaller pattern area to be displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from becoming difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the pattern formed when the front light guide plate 505a is irradiated is formed so as not to overlap even when the above-described abnormal winning notification effect or the notification effect corresponding to the input data of the input port is performed. It is desirable.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S692). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined effect process for determining and executing a predetermined effect (step S800A).

  The “predetermined effect” is an effect for notifying the possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state (open state) in which a game ball can easily enter. In the predetermined effect process in step S800A, the effect control CPU 101 receives the change display result of the normal symbol based on, for example, the command indicating the start of change of the normal symbol and the change display result received from the game control microcomputer 560 ( It is determined whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state), and based on the determination result, the presence / absence of a predetermined effect is determined or control for executing the predetermined effect is performed. In this embodiment, specifically, when the effect of rotating the roulette is executed in response to the normal symbol fluctuation display in the predetermined effect execution area 9F, the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. In such a case, the display result of “◯” is stopped and displayed in the predetermined effect execution area 9F, and the display result of “X” is stopped and displayed in the predetermined effect execution area 9F when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened. Produce an aspect. In this embodiment, the predetermined effect is a notice of whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state, and is one of the notice effects.

  It should be noted that by executing the predetermined effect, not only the possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state where the game ball is likely to enter (open state), but also whether or not the reach effect is executed and whether or not the big hit You may make it alert | report the possibility of becoming. In this case, for example, instead of “O” and “X” as the display result of the predetermined effect, the display result of “Chance” or “Intense heat” may be stopped and displayed, and there is a possibility of reaching (in addition to super reach) Or the possibility of a big hit. Further, for example, the display result of “small” may be stopped and displayed to notify the possibility of a small hit.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect process (1) (step S800B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the hold notice effect process (1) (step S800B). In the hold notice effect process (1) (a process of determining and executing a hold notice effect at the timing when the start winning is generated), the effect control CPU 101 first performs the non-display control for making the hold display described later in a non-display state. It is confirmed whether or not a pending non-display flag indicating that the program is being executed is set (step S6000).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, non-display control is executed when the movable object notice effect is being executed or when the super reach effect is being executed. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6000, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect is being executed. In such a case, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed so that the hold notice effect is not started immediately, and the hold notice effect is limited (in this case, a hold display return process described later is executed, thereby At the end of the notice effect or the super reach effect, the hold display is returned to the state in which the hold display is increased by the amount of the start winning that occurred during the non-display control).

  If the hold non-display flag is set (that is, if the hold display is in the non-display state), the processing is ended as it is. If the pending non-display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. (Step S6001). If there is no storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” (Y in step S6001), the process is terminated as it is.

  If there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” (N in step S6001), the effect control CPU 101 issues a command stored in the storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”. It is determined whether or not a hold notice setting restriction flag indicating that it is a process target and a hold notice restriction period is set (step S6002). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6018.

  If the hold notice setting limit flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the current command to be processed at the start winning prize, and determines whether all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order. Confirmation is made (step S6003).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as a command at the time of starting winning, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition designation) Command) will be received all at once within one timer interrupt, so the MODE data will be “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, And a command “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) should be stored (see FIG. 23). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command has been missed due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data and the command could not be received correctly. .

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) should be received in this order. Therefore, the MODE data is stored in the start winning command storage area in the order of “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”). It must be. Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. It can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of it is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variation category command match. (Step S6004). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Nevertheless, if the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 26) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a conflict.

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 to S6004, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, the command at the start prize is not received or may not be received. In the case where there is a match, the hold notice effect is restricted (in this embodiment, execution of the hold notice effect is prohibited).

  In this embodiment, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004 is determined to be N, the process proceeds to step S6017 and shifts to the pending notice restriction period. This is not the only case. For example, on the condition that it is determined as N in all the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004, the process may shift to step S6017 to shift to the pending notice restriction period.

  Further, it is not always necessary to provide all the two determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004 in the program, and the program may be configured to provide only one of the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004. .

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed (step S6005). Whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined effect executing flag when executing the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect process in step S800A, and executing the predetermined effect in step S6005. This can be determined by checking whether the flag is set. If the predetermined effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S6021.

  When the predetermined effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (see steps S658B and S662A) is zero. Is confirmed (step S6006). If the second reserved memory number is not 0 (that is, if there is a second reserved memory), the process proceeds to step S6021.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if there is no second reserved memory), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (step S6007). Whether or not the second special symbol variation display is in progress can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (see step S628) is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed, the process proceeds to step S6021.

  By executing the processing of steps S6005 to S6007, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, a predetermined effect is being executed, or the second hold If there is a memory, and if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed so that the hold notice effect is not started immediately, and the hold notice effect is limited.

  If the variation display of the second special symbol is not in progress, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using a random number for determining the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the effect mode based on the change category command to be processed. To determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect and the effect mode (step S6008).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a hold notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute a hold notice effect and an effect aspect. As shown in FIG. 51, in the hold notice determination table, determination values are assigned to no hold notice effect, hold notice effect (blue), hold notice effect (red), and hold notice effect (rainbow), respectively. ing. The hold notice effect (blue) is a hold notice effect in a form in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a blue round display. Moreover, the hold notice effect (red) is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a red round display. Also, the hold notice effect (rainbow) is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a rainbow-colored round display. In this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the normal display mode (display mode when the hold notice effect is not performed), the hold display is displayed as a green round display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, when it is specified in the pending notice determination table that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type (specifically, command C600 (H) is received). The change category command specifies that the change pattern type is super CA2-7 (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), and the change category command indicates super CA3. The determination value is assigned only when it is specified that the variation pattern type is −3 (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received). Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed only when the non-reach is out, the super reach is out, or the super reach big hit.

  In addition, not only the aspect shown by this embodiment, you may comprise so that non-reach out, super reach out, and a change notice category other than super reach big hit may be performed. In this case, for example, it may be configured to specify only whether or not to win a big hit based on the variable category command and to execute the hold notice effect according to the specification result.

  In FIG. 51, in this embodiment, with respect to the hold notice effect (red) and the hold notice effect (rainbow), a determination value is assigned only when the super reach is lost or the super reach big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed in such a manner that the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a red or rainbow-colored round display, it is determined that the super reach is achieved. .

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit of the hold notice effect (rainbow) is the highest, and then the expectation level (reliability) for the big notice of the hold notice effect (red). The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the hold notice effect (blue) is the lowest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, in this embodiment, a case in which the presence / absence of the hold notice effect is determined and the mode of the hold notice effect is collectively determined by a lottery process using one random number is shown. However, the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the mode of the hold notice effect may be determined in two stages by a lottery process using different random numbers. That is, first, only the presence or absence of the hold notice effect is determined by the lottery process using one random number, and when it is decided to execute the hold notice effect, the aspect of the hold notice effect is further determined by the lottery process using another random number. May be determined.

  In step S6008, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit game is being played, and if the big hit game is being played, it is desirable to decide not to forcibly execute the hold notice effect. Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be executed even during the big hit game.

  If it is decided to execute the hold notice effect in any manner (Y in step S6009), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first hold memory number addition designation command as the processing target hold memory number addition designation command. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S6010). If the hold memory number addition designation command to be processed is the first hold memory number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first hold display on the first hold memory display unit 18c in the determined hold notice effect mode. Increase by one (step S6011). Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control increases the blue, red, or iridescent round display as the first hold display by one in the first hold storage display unit 18c according to the determination result of step S6008. The hold notice effect is started. When step S6011 is executed and the hold notice effect is started, the display position of the first hold display to be notified is shifted one by one as the variable display is started and the first hold display is digested one by one. As a result, the first hold display subject to notice is finally digested and erased from the first hold storage display unit 18c, and the hold notice effect ends (see step S660B).

  When the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage count addition designation command (that is, when the command is the second pending storage count addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines the pending notice announcement effect to be decided. In the aspect, the second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 18d (step S6012). Specifically, the CPU for effect control 101 increases the blue, red, or rainbow-colored round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d according to the determination result of step S6008. The hold notice effect is started. When step S6012 is executed and the hold notice effect is started, the display position of the second hold display to be notified is shifted one by one as the variable display is started and the second hold display is digested one by one. As a result, the second hold display to be notified is finally digested and erased from the second hold storage display unit 18d, and the hold notice effect ends (see step S662B).

  When it is determined not to execute the hold notice effect (N of step S6009), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold memory number addition designation command to be processed is the first hold memory number addition designation command. Confirmation is made (step S6013). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 increases the first pending display by one in the first pending storage display unit 18c in a normal manner. (Step S6014). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c.

  When the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage number addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operations in the first mode. The second hold display is increased by one in the 2 hold storage display unit 18d (step S6015). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the current processing target command storage area in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S6016).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  Specifically, when a game ball starts and wins simultaneously at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command for the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, and A total of six commands including a command set of a first reserved memory number addition designation command and a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a command set of a second reserved memory number addition designation command for a start prize to the second start prize opening 14 May be transmitted within one timer interrupt. In this case, two sets of start prize commands are stored in the start prize command storage area within one timer interrupt. It is set to “1”. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 checks the undetermined information sequentially from the storage area of the start winning command storage area in ascending order of the area number, and the undetermined information is “1”. The command stored in the first storage area is used as the processing target, and the processing from step S6002 is executed. When the processing is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. Next, when returning to step S6001, since the undetermined information of the next storage area is also “1”, the undetermined information is stored in the second storage area of “1”. The process after step S6002 is executed with the command as a processing target, and when the process is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. In other words, when the game ball starts and wins at the same time in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, two sets of start winnings within one timer interruption in the hold notice effect processing (1) of step S800B. Processing for determining the presence / absence and mode of the hold notice effect for the time command is performed.

  In step S6017, the production control CPU 101 sets a hold notice setting restriction flag (step S6017), and starts a notice notice restriction period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the processing target pending memory count addition designation command is the first pending memory count addition designation command (step S6018). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 increases the first pending display by one in the first pending storage display unit 18c in a normal manner. (Step S6019). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c.

  When the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage number addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operations in the first mode. The second hold display is increased by one in the 2 hold storage display unit 18d (step S6020). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d.

  Note that if the pending storage count addition designation command is missed or cannot be normally received, it is desirable to skip the processing of steps S6019 and S6020 so as not to increase the erroneous pending display. In addition, when the reserved storage number addition designation command is missed or cannot be normally received, the first hold display may be increased or the second hold display may be increased by default.

  In addition, even after the hold display is incremented by 1 in the normal manner in steps S6019 and S6020, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and stores the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Check if the area still exists. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  In step S6021, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the processing target pending memory count addition designation command is the first pending memory count addition designation command (step S6021). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 increases the first pending display by one in the first pending storage display unit 18c in a normal manner. (Step S6022). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c.

  When the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage number addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operations in the first mode. The second hold display is increased by one in the 2 hold storage display unit 18d (step S6023). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area to 1 (step S6024). In this case, based on the determination postponement information being set in step S6024, the determination is postponed in the on-hold notice effect processing (2) described later at the timing of suspending the hold memory (shifting the hold display). The determination of the hold notice effect with respect to the hold memory is performed, and the hold notice effect may be retroactively started.

  In addition, even after the determination postponement information is set in step 6026, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001, and is there still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area? Confirm whether or not. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C). In the hold notice effect process (2) (a process for determining and executing a hold notice effect at the timing of digesting the hold memory (shifting the hold display)), the effect control CPU 101 first sets the hold notice setting restriction flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6501). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, not during the hold notice restriction period), the process proceeds to step S6506.

  If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, during the hold notice restriction period), the production control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command at the time of the start winning prize stored in the start winning prize command storage area. (Step S6502). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the commands for the start winning prize are stored are in a storage state in which all the commands for the start winning prize are received in order. (Step S6503).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as a command at the time of starting winning, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition designation) Command) will be received all at once within one timer interrupt, so if the commands are stored in all the storage areas 1-8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data will be stored. The commands “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) should be stored (see FIG. 23). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in a storage state in which a command is lost due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data. , It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) should be received in this order. Therefore, if the command is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)”. (Or “C1 (H)”). Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. In other words, it can be determined that there is still a storage area in a storage state in which the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If the storage area in the storage state in which it is determined that the received command at the start winning prize is not in the order or is partially missing, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process as it is. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state where all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the command storing area at the starting winning prize. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent (step S6504). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Nevertheless, if the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 26) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process as it is. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in the storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 resets the pending notice setting restriction flag. (Step S6505). That is, in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area, since the command at the start winning prize is stored normally, the command that triggered the start of the pending notice restriction period is missed. It is determined that the on-hold storage in which the inconsistency has occurred is exhausted, the on-hold notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the on-hold notice restriction period ends.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 47 (step S6506). If there is no storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” (Y in step S6506), the process is terminated as it is.

  If there is a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” (N in step S6506), the effect control CPU 101 executes a command stored in the storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1”. It is set as a process target and it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined effect is being executed (step S6507). Whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined effect executing flag when executing the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect process in step S800A, and executing the predetermined effect in step S6507. This can be determined by checking whether the flag is set. If the predetermined effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is.

  When the predetermined effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (see steps S658B and S662A) is zero. Is confirmed (step S6508). If the second reserved memory number is not 0 (that is, if there is a second reserved memory), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if there is no second reserved memory), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (step S6509). Whether or not the second special symbol variation display is in progress can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (see step S628) is set. If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, the processing is terminated as it is.

  By executing the processing of steps S6507 to S6509, in this embodiment, even if it is the timing when the hold memory is digested (hold display is shifted) after the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, the predetermined effect is still executed. If it is in the middle, if there is a second reserved memory, or if the second special symbol is being variably displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is further postponed, and the hold notice effect is limited. In this embodiment, the hold notice effect process (2) is executed at the timing when the hold memory is exhausted (the hold display is shifted) at the start of the change display of the effect symbol. Since there is no case where the super-reach effect is being executed, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movable object notice effect or the super-reach effect is being executed and to perform the process of limiting the hold notice effect.

  If the variation display of the second special symbol is not in progress, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the variation category command to be processed at present (that is, the variation category command in which the determination postponement information stored in the start winning command storage area is set) ), A lottery process using a random number for determining the presence / absence of the holding notice effect and the appearance mode is performed, and the presence / absence of the holding notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6510). Note that the specific processing content of the determination process of the hold notice effect in step S6510 is the same as that in step S6008 of the hold notice effect process (1).

  When it is decided to execute the hold notice effect in any manner (Y in step S6511), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the processing target hold memory number addition designation command (that is, in the start winning command storage area). It is confirmed whether or not the stored storage number addition designation command in which the stored determination postponement information is set is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S6512). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 uses the first pending storage display unit 18c to display the first pending display corresponding to the command to be processed. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the determined hold notice effect mode (step S6513). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 changes the first hold display corresponding to the command to be processed from the green round display to the blue, in the first hold storage display unit 18c according to the determination result of step S6510. Change to a red or rainbow-colored round display, and start the hold notice effect retrospectively.

  When the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage count addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage count addition designation command), the presentation control CPU 101 In the second hold storage display unit 18d, the display mode of the second hold display corresponding to the command to be processed is changed from the normal display mode to the determined hold notice effect mode (step S6514). Specifically, the CPU 101 for production control changes the second hold display corresponding to the command to be processed from the green round display to the blue, in the second hold storage display unit 18d according to the determination result of step S6510. Change to a red or rainbow-colored round display, and start the hold notice effect retrospectively.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the command (symbol designation command) in the storage area in which the command corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol to be started this time is stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area. , The variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) are deleted, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted (step S6515). ). Specifically, when the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received at the start of variation of the effect symbol (when the hold notice effect (2) is executed in step S660C), the storage area of the start winning command storage area Of these, these commands in the first storage area for storing the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation command are deleted, and each of the storage areas in the subsequent start winning command storage area is deleted. Shift content. In addition, when the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received at the start of variation of the effect symbol (when the hold notice effect (2) is executed in step S662C), among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area, Delete these commands in the first storage area that stores the design designation command, variable category command, and second reserved memory number addition designation command, and shift the contents of each storage area in the subsequent start winning command storage area To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the hold notice effect (N of step S6511), the process proceeds to step S6516.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the determination postponement information in the storage area of the command to be processed in the start winning command storage area and sets the value of the determination postponement information to 0 (step S6516).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6506 and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processing after step S6507 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas whose determination postponement information is “1”.

  In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is limited, the determination of the hold notice effect itself is delayed until the time when the hold memory is consumed (shift of hold display) (see step S6510). It may be configured to execute processing until the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the process of determining the mode at the time of winning, and to delay only the execution of the hold notice effect until digestion of the hold memory (hold display shift). .

  In addition, when it is configured to delay only the execution of the hold notice effect as described above, if a big hit occurs during the restriction of the hold notice effect, the presence or state of the already decided hold notice effect is determined. It is desirable to cancel the determination result and not to execute the hold notice effect.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 55, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2). In the case of a command, a display result 3 designation command, or a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio of determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased, and in the case of “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. You may make it raise the ratio which determines the combination of the production | presentation symbol in which 3 symbols were equal in the same even number design.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (notice effect other than the hold notice effect. For example, a light guide plate effect, a step-up notice effect, a mini character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, during the effect symbol display. , Effect blade combination notice effect) is determined or a notice effect setting process for setting an effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8003). When it is determined that the light guide plate effect is to be executed as the notice effect, for example, the effect to be executed may be distributed according to the big hit expectation level. Specifically, when the big hit expectation degree is high, the rear light guide plate 505b is irradiated so as to perform control to emit and display a picture (for example, a picture that suggests a big hit (high expectation degree)). When the big hit expectation degree is low, the front light guide plate 505a may be irradiated to control to emit and display a picture (for example, a picture suggesting a big hit (low expectation degree)). However, when the abnormal winning notification flag is set in step S685 or when the input port data reception flag is set in step S689, the abnormal winning notification effect or the notification effect is visually recognized regardless of the big hit expectation. In order to prevent it from becoming difficult, the light guide plate on which the pattern is formed (for example, the front light guide plate 505a in which the area where the pattern is displayed is smaller than that of the rear light guide plate 505b) is irradiated to perform control to emit and display the pattern.

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 56 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. If it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, pseudo-stops, and temporary stop symbols in the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S8105, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 when the movable object notice effect is executed, or the effect blade effect notice effect is produced. When performing the above, an effect of moving the effect blade accessory 79 by driving the motor 87 is performed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 even when the super reach effect is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is the execution timing of the light guide plate effect (step S8105A). Whether or not it is the execution timing of the light guide plate effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variation time timer. If it is the execution timing of the light guide plate effect, the process proceeds to step S8105B, and if it is not the execution timing of the light guide plate effect, the process proceeds to step S8106.

  In step S8105B, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (step S8105B). . For example, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a high probability state flag and a high base state flag are set. In this embodiment, the display position of the fourth symbol is different in the case of effect mode A or C and in the case of effect mode B. Specifically, the display position of the fourth symbol in the effect mode B is a position that does not overlap with the pattern that is lit and displayed even when the light guide plate effect using either the front light guide plate 505a or the rear light guide plate 505b is executed. is there. On the other hand, the display position of the 4th pattern in the effect mode A or C is a position where the light guide plate effect using the front light guide plate 505a is executed and does not overlap with the pattern displayed by light emission, but emits light from the front light guide plate 505a. When a light guide plate effect using the light guide plate 505b is performed after a large area of the displayed pattern, the position overlaps with the light-emitting display pattern. Therefore, in the case of the effect mode A or C, if the light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b is performed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the fourth pattern. Therefore, in step S8105B, based on the display position of the fourth symbol, it is confirmed whether or not the light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b can be executed without hindering the visual recognition of the fourth symbol. I can say that.

  When the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (Y in step S8105B), the effect control CPU 101 is not displaying the hold. It is confirmed whether or not a flag is set (step S8105C). When the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (N in step S8105B), or when the pending non-display flag is set (step In Y of S8105C, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to limit the light guide plate effect (step S8105E). In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 may perform control so as not to perform the light guide plate effect at all, or may irradiate the front light guide plate 505a in which the area where the pattern is displayed is smaller than that of the rear light guide plate 505b. May be controlled to emit light. Further, for example, when the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state, the light guide plate effect is controlled so as not to be performed at all. When the screen is a background screen (production mode B) corresponding to a high probability / high base state, but the hold non-display flag is set (that is, an effect such as a super reach effect or a moving object notice effect is executed) ), The front light guide plate 505a may be irradiated to control to display and display the pattern.

  On the other hand, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (Y in step S8105B), and the pending non-display flag is not set. In the case (N in Step S8105C), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the light guide plate effect (Step S8105D). In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 can perform control to illuminate and display the design by irradiating the rear light guide plate 505b with a larger area where the design is displayed compared to the front light guide plate 505a or the front light guide plate 505a. As described above, in this embodiment, when the light guide plate effect is performed, the execution is limited so as not to overlap the effects such as the fourth symbol, the super reach effect, and the movable object notice effect. Therefore, the light guide plate effect using the light guide plate can be executed without hindering visual recognition of effects such as the 4th symbol, the super reach effect, and the movable object notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 57, when the background screen is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state and the flag for pending non-display is not set, the light guide plate effect is not limited. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the background screen is a background screen corresponding to a high probability / high base state (production mode B), the light guide plate is not limited regardless of the state of the pending non-display flag. An effect may be executed, and when the pending non-display flag is not set, the light guide plate effect may be executed without limitation regardless of the effect mode. That is, it may be determined whether to restrict the light guide plate effect based only on either the state of the hold non-display flag or the state of the effect mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect (step S8106). Note that whether or not it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect, the process proceeds to step S8108.

  If it is not the start timing of the movable object notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S8107). Whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is not the start timing of the super reach production, the process proceeds to step S8111.

  When it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect or the start timing of the super reach effect (Y in step S8106 or Y in step S8107), the effect control CPU 101 performs the current first display in the first reserved storage display unit 18c. The display state of one hold display and the current display state of the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d are stored (step S8108). In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 stores the display states of the first hold display and the second hold display in a hold display state storage area provided in the RAM. Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a hold non-display flag indicating that the non-display control for making the hold display non-display is being executed (step S8109). Then, the production control CPU 101 erases all of the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d, and starts the non-display control with the hold display in the non-display state. (Step S8110).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect (step S8111). Note that whether or not it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect, the process proceeds to step S8113.

  If it is not the end timing of the movable object notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end time of the super reach effect (step S8112). Note that whether or not it is the end timing of the super reach effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is not the end timing of the super reach production, the process proceeds to step S8115.

  When it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect (Y in step S8111 or Y in step S8112), the effect control CPU 101 resets the pending non-display flag (step S8113). ). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control executes a hold display return process for returning the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d to the display state, and hides them. Control is terminated (step S8114).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the hold display return processing (step S8114). In the hold display return process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 47 (step S7000). . If there is no undetermined information of “1” (that is, if no new start winning has occurred during the non-display control), the effect control CPU 101 stores the hold stored in step S8108 as it is. The first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 18d are returned to the display state (step S7011).

  If there is one for which the undetermined information is “1” (that is, when a new start prize has been generated during the non-display control), the production control CPU 101 causes a new start prize to be generated. It is checked whether or not the processing has been completed for all received commands at the time of start winning (step S7001). If the processing is finished for all the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, the processing is finished.

  If there is an unprocessed command at the time of start winning, the effect control CPU 101 sets the command stored in the storage area for which the undetermined information is “1” as a processing target, and also sets a pending notice setting restriction flag. It is confirmed whether or not is set (step S7002). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7006.

  If the hold notice setting limit flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the current command to be processed at the start winning prize, and determines whether all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order. Confirmation is made (step S7003). In step S7003, the effect control CPU 101 can determine whether or not all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order by executing the same process as step S6003 of the hold notice effect process (1). .

  When it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of the command is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S7005. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variation category command match. (Step S7004). In step S7004, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing similar to that in step S6004 of the hold notice effect processing (1), so that the contents of the symbol designation command to be processed and the variable category command match. It can be determined whether or not. When determining that the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S7006.

  When it is determined that the commands at the start winning prize are not received in order (N in step S7003), or when it is determined that the contents of the current design target symbol designation command and the variable category command do not match ( In step S7004 N), the effect control CPU 101 sets a hold notice setting restriction flag (step S7005).

  In step S7006, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command (step S7006). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 performs the first pending display in a normal manner based on the pending display display state stored in step S8108. Is increased by one, the first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 18d are restored (step S7007).

  When the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage count addition designation command (that is, the second pending storage count addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stores the suspension stored in step S8108. Based on the display state of the display, the second hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d in a state where the second hold display is increased by one in a normal manner. Is restored (step S7008).

  However, when the processes of steps S7007 and S7008 are executed, if there are a plurality of storage areas where the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information becomes “1”. The first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 18d at the timing of executing steps S7007 and S7008 for the storage area command to be processed last among the stored storage areas To return. For example, if two new start winnings have occurred during the non-display control, when performing the processing of steps S7007 and S7008 for the first undecided command, the hold display stored in step S8108 Only when the stored content is updated to a state in which the display state is increased by one to the hold display, the hold display is further increased by one when performing the processing of steps S7007 and S7008 for the second undecided command. In the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c and in the second hold storage display unit 18d (that is, in the state where the hold display is increased by two from the display state of the hold display stored in step S8108). The second hold display is restored.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the current processing target command storage area in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S7009).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area to 1 (step S7010). In this case, based on the determination postponement information being set in step S7010, the deferred storage is deferred in the deferral notice effect processing (2) at the timing of degrading the deferred memory (shifting the deferred display). In some cases, the hold notice effect is determined, and the hold notice effect is retroactively started.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S7001 and confirms whether or not there is still a storage area where the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processing after step S7002 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and according to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blade control is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 53, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round. Then, the process timer is started (step S1909). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the process data includes a control for performing an operation designation effect for instructing a right-handed operation (step S1910), and further includes a control for performing an operation designation effect. If not, it is confirmed whether or not the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (step S1912). Based on this, light guide plate production will be performed. In this embodiment, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state that occurs when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, so that the big winning opening serving as a winning area is obtained. Becomes open. The big prize opening is provided on the lower right side of the effect display device 9. For this reason, when the big hit gaming state is started, an operation instruction effect for displaying an image for instructing a right turn on the effect display device 9 is performed. In addition, you may make it vary the operation instruction | indication effect which instruct | indicates right-handed based on jackpot classification. For example, at the time of 15R big hit, an operation instruction effect is displayed for displaying an image for instructing a right turn using a large display area. May be performed. In this case, since a small image is displayed in the case of a sudden hit as compared with the case of 15R big hit, it is possible not to limit the light guide plate effect described later (that is, to perform the light guide plate effect without limitation). Also good).

  If it is determined in step S1910 that control for performing an operation designation effect for instructing right-handed is included, or the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in step S1912 corresponds to the high probability / high base state. If it is determined that the background screen (effect mode B) is not reached, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to limit the light guide plate effect (step S1911). Here, for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to illuminate and display the pattern by irradiating the front light guide plate 505a. On the other hand, it is determined in step S1910 that the control for performing the operation designation effect for instructing the right-handed operation is not included, and the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in step S1912 is in the high probability / high base state. When it is determined that the corresponding background screen (effect mode B) is obtained, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the light guide plate effect. Here, for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to illuminate and display the pattern by irradiating the rear light guide plate 505b (step S1912). As described above, when control for displaying a right-handed image as the operation designation effect is performed on the effect display device 9, or when the background screen is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to a high probability / high base state. In some cases, a light guide plate on which an image for instructing a right-hand shot or a 4th design is not easily recognized (that is, does not overlap) is displayed as compared to the rear light guide plate 505b. Control is performed to illuminate and display the front light guide plate 505a) with a small area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged without noticing the operation instruction.

  Subsequent to step S1911 or S1913, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805) (step S1914).

  It should be noted that, in addition to the process for displaying a big hit, a process for displaying a small hit is provided. In the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (a big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the production based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit every process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the confirmation of reception of the ending command, for example, during the round process (see step S805).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part). Then, various lamps as a production component, the speaker 27 as a production component, and the movable member 78 as a production component and the production blade accessory 79 are controlled (step S883). An effect of displaying or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the fourth symbol process (step S706) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the fourth symbol process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S9000 to S9200 according to the value of the fourth symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the 4th symbol process, the display state of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d in the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the 4th symbol is realized, but synchronized with the variation of the 1st special symbol. The control related to variable display of the 4th symbol in the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol is also variable in the 4th symbol display area 9d for the 2nd special symbol synchronized with the variation of the 2nd special symbol. Control related to display is also executed in one fourth symbol process. The variable display of the fourth symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are executed by another fourth symbol process. May be. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which fourth symbol process processing is executing the variation display of the fourth symbol.

  It should be noted that the process for performing the variable display of the 4th symbol is not configured as a process process, but the display control data for the variable display of the 4th symbol is displayed as the 4th symbol as in the special symbol display control process (see FIG. 39). You may make it comprise as a 4th symbol display control process sequentially set to the output buffer for display control data setting. In this case, for example, based on the reception of the symbol variation designation command, the fourth symbol variation display is started by starting the update of the display control data for variation display of the fourth symbol, and the symbol confirmation designation Based on the reception of the command, the display control data for the stop symbol display of the fourth symbol may be set in the output buffer to stop display the stop symbol. Then, the stop symbol may be stopped and displayed until the next symbol variation designation command is received.

  Fourth symbol variation start process (step S9000): Control is performed so that variation of the fourth symbol is started upon reception of a start command (symbol variation designation command or display result designation command). Then, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation processing (step S9100).

  The start command is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Specifically, the start command includes a symbol variation designation command, a variation pattern command, and a display result designation command. The production control CPU 101 may start the variable display of the 4th symbol based on the reception of all the commands, and may have received any one or more of these commands. On the basis of this, the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started. Also, a pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command, a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be included in the start time command.

  Fourth symbol variation processing (step S9100): Controls the switching timing and the like of the variation state (variation speed) of the fourth symbol. When the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation stop process (step S9200).

  Production symbol variation stop process (step S9200): Control is performed to stop the variation of the fourth symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation start process (step S9000).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a fourth symbol variation start process (step S9000) in the fourth symbol process shown in FIG. In the fourth symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state. (Step S9001A). When the background screen is a background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display position of the fourth symbol (fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d). When the display mode is changed to the display position in the production mode B (step S9001B) and the background screen is not the background screen (production mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state, the display position of the fourth symbol is changed to the production mode. The display position is changed to A or C (step S9001C). In this embodiment, the display position of the fourth symbol (fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d) is changed according to the effect mode by executing the processing of steps S9001A to S9001C.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S9001D). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table for variably displaying the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step S9002). If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S9003). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table for variably displaying the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (step S9004).

  If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the display result designation command reception flag is set (step S9005). If set, the CPU 101 for effect control displays a process table for variably displaying the 4th symbol for power failure recovery (in this embodiment, the 4th symbol is displayed in both the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d). A process table for variably displaying is selected (step S9006).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9001D to S9004, the variation display of the fourth symbol is started based on the reception of the symbol variation designation command as the start command. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the symbol variation by executing the processes of steps S9005 and S9006, the variation symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. Is not resumed, but the variable display of the fourth symbol is controlled so as to be resumed. That is, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the display result designation command stored in the backup RAM area is retransmitted (see step S44). Can resume the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the display result designation command.

  In this embodiment, two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, and the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is started based on the reception of the symbol variation designation command is shown. When a 4th symbol variation display is performed on a gaming machine equipped with only a symbol display (in this case, the symbol variation designation command is not transmitted), based on the reception of the display result designation command as the start command. What is necessary is just to start the fluctuation | variation display of a 4th design. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with only one special symbol display, the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started based on the reception of the variation pattern command as the start time command. However, even in this case, when the power failure is restored, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be started based on the reception of the display result designation command.

  If the gaming machine is configured to store the symbol variation designation command in the backup RAM area and transmit the symbol variation designation command when the power supply is resumed, the processing of steps S9005 and S9006 is performed. It does not have to be included. In this case, even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed, the effect control CPU 56 performs the processes of steps S9001 and S9002 and receives the first special variation designation command when it receives the first symbol variation designation command. In the fourth symbol display area 9c for symbols, the variation display of the fourth symbol is resumed, and when the second symbol variation designation command is received, the processing of steps S9003 and S9004 is performed to The variation display of the fourth symbol may be resumed in the fourth symbol display area 9d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display result (stop symbol) of the fourth symbol in accordance with the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step S9007). ). In this embodiment, when the received display result designation command indicates 15 rounds of big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit) (the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display of a predetermined big hit display color (for example, red) is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d as the stop symbol. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a hit of 2 rounds (sudden probability change big hit, small hit) (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command) ), The effect control CPU 101 determines to turn on the display of a predetermined display color (for example, yellow) for two rounds in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d as the stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be different depending on whether suddenly a big hit or a small hit (for example, it is determined that different display colors (for example, yellow and yellow-green) are turned on) In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a loss (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first stop symbol as the stop symbol. In the four symbol display areas 9c and 9d, it is determined that the display of the display color for shift (for example, blue) is turned on.

  In step S9007, the stop symbol corresponding to the received symbol variation designation command is determined from the two fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. For example, when the first symbol variation designation command is received, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is determined, and when the second symbol variation designation command is received, the second symbol variation designation command is used. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol display area 9d is determined. Similarly, in the fourth symbol process, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the received symbol variation designation command is started in the two fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d, and the symbol confirmation designation command is started. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol corresponding to the symbol variation designation command is stopped and displayed based on the reception of the symbol, and the stopped symbol is continuously displayed until the next variation display is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol is variably displayed with the same display color and variation pattern in the two fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, but the fourth symbol display for the first special symbol is shown. Different display colors and variation patterns (for example, different lighting) between the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the region 9c and the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol display region 9d for the second special symbol. Further, the fluctuation display may be executed at a blinking time interval). In addition, when the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 9c, and when the 4th symbol display area 9d for the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 9d. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol (for example, display color or shape) may be varied.

  In addition, the aspect of the stop symbol of a 4th symbol is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, even in the case of 15 round big hits, the display of different display colors is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d depending on whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit. Also good. Further, for example, in the case of a probable big hit, the same display color display is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d without distinguishing the probable big hit of 15 rounds from the probable big hit of 2 rounds. You may do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. You may make it provide the 4th symbol display area common with a symbol. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  Further, depending on the interrupt cycle in the timer interrupt process executed by the production control microcomputer 100, when the process of step S9007 is executed, the display result designation command storage area is not stored in the data every time. It is assumed that In order to avoid such a situation, for example, the data stored in the display result designation command storage area may not be cleared until it is read in step S9007. The data stored in the result specifying command storage area may be reliably read.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S9002, S9004, and S9006 (step S9008).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control for starting the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (step S9009). In this case, when the 4th symbol variation display is started in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9002, the 4th symbol variation is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Display starts. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, display is started such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is started according to the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9004, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Is started. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol, display is started such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is started in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9006, the variation variation of the fourth symbol (power failure is displayed in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d). Fluctuation display for recovery) starts. For example, in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d, display is started such that display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is displayed in both of the fourth symbol display areas 9c, 9d when the power failure is restored. However, when the power failure is restored, the fourth symbol display areas 9c, 9d are displayed. A display area different from the above may be set, and the 4th symbol variation display may be executed in the separately set display area.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the fourth symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation processing (step S9100) (step S9010).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the fourth symbol variation processing (step S9100) in the fourth symbol process. In the fourth symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9101). When the process timer times out (step S9102), process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S9103). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control is performed to execute the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 (step S9104). In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed according to the content of the process data of the process table selected in step S9002, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Is executed. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, display is performed such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9004, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Is executed. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol, display is performed such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9006, the variation display of the fourth symbol (power failure) in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. Fluctuation display for recovery) is executed. For example, the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at fixed time intervals in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S9105). If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S9106). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the fourth symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation stop process (step S9200) (step S9107).

  Even when the power failure is restored, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 when the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area times out. Therefore, even when the fourth symbol variation display is started based on the display result designation command received at the time of power failure recovery (see steps S9005 and S9006), reception of the symbol confirmation designation command is confirmed in step S9105. On the basis of this, control is performed to stop the variation display of the fourth symbol.

  Even if the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 101 can set the variation pattern command reception flag, the jackpot start designation command reception flag, or the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag. (Steps S9108, S9109, S9110), the process proceeds to step S9107, and the value of the fourth symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation stop process (step S9200).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9108 to S9110, even if the symbol confirmation designation command cannot be received, the variation pattern command, jackpot start designation command or customer waiting demonstration designation If the command is received, the change display of the 4th symbol can be stopped. Therefore, the design confirmation designation command is missed, and an unnatural effect such that the variation display of the fourth symbol continues even though the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is finished. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a fourth symbol variation stop process (step S9200) in the fourth symbol process. In the fourth symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first stops and displays the stop symbol determined in step S9007 in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d (step S9201). For example, in the case of 15 big hits (probability big hit, normal big hit), the display of a predetermined big hit display color (for example, red) is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. In the case of two round hits (sudden probability change big hit, small hit), the display of a predetermined display color (for example, yellow) per two rounds is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. . Further, in the case of a deviation, the display of the display color for deviation (for example, blue) is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol of the fourth symbol stopped and displayed in step S9201 is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d until the next variable display is started.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the fourth symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation start process (step S9000) (step S9202).

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, even if a big hit is reached, the value of the 4th symbol process flag is changed in step S9202 to immediately shift to the 4th symbol variation start process. After S9201, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is determined that it is a big hit, the fourth symbol stop process may be repeatedly executed, and after the big hit, the process may be shifted to the fourth symbol variation start process. During the game, control may be performed so that the fourth symbol is not displayed, and the process may be shifted to the fourth symbol variation start process after the big hit. Also, for example, even when a big hit is made, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is changed in step S9202 to shift to the fourth symbol variation start process. However, steps S9001A to S9001C in the fourth symbol variation start process are performed. This process may be executed after step S9007. By controlling in this way, a base with a low probability is always obtained during a big hit, but this can prevent the background from being changed in the processes of steps S9001A to S9001C.

  66 and 67 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode of the light guide plate. FIG. 66 shows an example in which the light guide plate effect is executed in the case of the effect mode A or C and the effect mode B.

  FIG. 66 (a1) illustrates the display position of the fourth symbol (fourth symbol display areas 9c, 9d) on the effect display device 9 in the effect mode A or C, and FIG. 66 (b1) illustrates the effect. The display position of the 4th symbol in illustration display device 9 in the case of mode B is illustrated. In this embodiment, the display position of the fourth symbol is different in the case of effect mode A or C and in the case of effect mode B. In the example shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the effect mode A or C, the fourth symbols (fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d) are displayed side by side in the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 9. ing. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (b 1), in the case of effect mode B, the fourth symbols (fourth symbol display areas 9 c, 9 d) are displayed vertically in the lower left part of the display area of the effect display device 9. Has been. In addition, the display position of the 4th symbol according to the production mode shown to FIG. 66 (a1) and (b1) is only an example, and may be other arbitrary positions.

  66 (a2) and 66 (a3) show an example in which the light guide plate effect is executed in the effect mode A or C. FIGS. 66 (b2) and 66 (b3) show the effect mode B. In this case, an example in which a light guide plate effect is executed is shown. Specifically, FIGS. 66 (a2) and 66 (b2) show an example in which a light guide plate effect using the front light guide plate 505a is executed. As shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) and 66 (b2), in this embodiment, the 4th symbol (4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d) uses the front light guide plate 505a in any production mode. It does not overlap with the pattern ("big hit" illustrated in FIGS. 66 (a2) and (b2)) that is displayed by emitting the light guide plate effect. Therefore, in any effect mode, the light guide plate effect using the front light guide plate 505a can be executed without disturbing the visual recognition of the fourth symbol.

  FIGS. 66A3 and 66B3 show an example in which a light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b is executed. As shown in FIG. 66 (b3), in this embodiment, in the effect mode B, the fourth symbol (fourth symbol display areas 9c, 9d) is a light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b. Is not overlapped with the pattern (character, character, or background pattern illustrated in FIG. 66 (b3)) that is executed and displayed. However, in the case of the effect mode A or C, the 4th symbol (4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d) is a pattern (FIG. 66 (FIG. 66 (d)) that is displayed by performing the light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b. It overlaps with the pattern of the background exemplified in a3) and is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, when it is not the production mode B, the visual recognition of the 4th symbol is hindered, and therefore execution of the light guide plate production using the rear light guide plate 505b is limited.

  For example, in the jackpot display process, when the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the background screen (effect mode B) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (N in step S1912), the light guide plate effect As shown in FIG. 66 (a2), control for irradiating the front light guide plate 505a is performed (specifically, this corresponds to control for limiting the light guide plate effect in step S1911). At this time, if the rear light guide plate 505b is irradiated as a light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the fourth symbol (fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d) displayed on the effect screen device 9 as shown in FIG. 66 (a3). Therefore, by controlling to irradiate the front light guide plate 505a on which the pattern is formed so that the 4th symbol can be visually recognized at any display position in any effect mode (that is, the light guide plate using the rear light guide plate 505b) By restricting the execution of the effect), it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 67 shows an example in which the light guide plate effect is executed when the operation designation display control is performed. Specifically, FIG. 67A shows an example in which operation designation display control is performed in which an image drawn “Aiming to the right” is displayed on the effect screen device 9. In addition, when operation designation display control is performed, as the light guide plate effect, an example in which the front light guide plate 505a is irradiated (FIG. 67 (b)), an example in which the rear light guide plate 505b is irradiated (FIG. 67 (c)). )It is shown. For example, in the jackpot display process, when the operation designation display control indicating the right-handed is performed, the control for irradiating the front light guide plate 505a is performed as the light guide plate effect (specifically, the light guide plate in step S1911). It corresponds to the control that restricts the production). As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 67 (c), when the rear light guide plate 505b is irradiated as a light guide plate effect (FIG. 67 (c)), an operation designation display (“to the right” is displayed on the effect screen device 9. It is difficult to visually recognize the operation designation display), but by controlling the front light guide plate 505a on which the design is formed so that the operation designation display can be visually recognized (FIG. 67 (b)), the operation is displayed. It is possible to prevent the designated display from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and display and display the display result (for example, the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d). And an effect display means (for example, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b) which is arranged at a position where at least a part of the specific area on the front side of the variable display means overlaps the identification information and performs a predetermined effect display. The information is visible through the specific area in the effect display means (see, for example, FIG. 66), and the effect display means displays the effect in the specific area at least when the variable display means performs variable display. (For example, the part in which the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to restrict the light guide plate production in step S8105E or step S1911). It is configured. Therefore, the effect by the effect display means can be executed without hindering the visual recognition of the identification information.

  In this embodiment, the effect display means for performing a predetermined effect display (for example, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b) is arranged at a position overlapping the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. The variable display means (for example, the 1st special symbol) which carries out variable display of a plurality of kinds of discernment information (for example, the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special symbol, and the production design) which can identify each, and derive and display a display result The symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9), and at least a part of the specific area on the front side of the variable display means may be arranged at a position overlapping the identification information. Also in this case, the effect display means restricts the execution of the effect display in the specific area at least when the variable display means performs variable display. By comprising in that way, the production | presentation by an effect display means can be performed, without preventing the visual recognition of identification information.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state or the high base state), an operation instruction display for prompting a predetermined operation (for example, “ The effect display means restricts the execution of the effect display at the overlapping position at least when the operation instruction display is being performed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect control microcomputer 100 in step S1911). The part which performs the control which restrict | limits a light-guide plate effect: See FIG. 67). Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect display means without disturbing the visual recognition of the operation instruction display, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged without noticing the operation instruction.

  Further, in this embodiment, an abnormality that occurs during the control of the gaming machine is determined, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality display indicating that the abnormality has occurred is performed. The effect display means is configured to restrict the execution of the effect display at the overlapping position at least when an abnormal display is being performed (for example, the portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the processing of steps S687 and S691). Has been. Therefore, the effect by the effect display means can be executed without disturbing the visual recognition of the abnormal display.

  In this embodiment, in order to avoid that the picture or character displayed by the light guide plate overlaps the information displayed on the effect display device 9 and the information cannot be visually recognized, the control of the light guide plate effect is performed. (Specifically, the light guide plate to be used is selected). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the light guide plate effect is being performed, the display position of the information displayed on the effect display device 9 is visually You may control to change to a possible position. That is, when it is possible to avoid overlapping with the light guide plate effect by changing the display position of the 4th symbol or abnormal display, control is performed so as to change the display position of the 4th symbol or abnormal display regardless of the effect mode. May be. Further, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated lamp for displaying the fourth symbol may be provided.

  Moreover, it is set as the structure which performs an effect display separately in several places of a light-guide plate by light-emitting which of the several light-emitting members provided in a different location with respect to one light-guide plate, 4th design etc. You may control so that only the location which overlaps with identification information or other information is not light-emitted. For example, only the 511h of the rear light guide plate 505b in FIG. 4B may not emit light so that the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d in the case other than the effect mode B can be viewed. . Moreover, it is set as the structure which can control whether the character (511a, 511b, 511c of FIG.4 (b)) which can be displayed on the back light-guide plate 505b can be light-emitted separately, and the 4th of the effect display apparatus 9 among these characters. You may control so that the thing which does not overlap the symbol display area 9c, 9d etc. may be light-emitted. In addition, during the fluctuation of the identification information such as the 4th pattern, it is limited not to emit the light that overlaps the identification information (or the light guide plate effect is not executed), and the light guide plate effect is executed without limitation during the demonstration or at the big hit. You may make it do.

  In addition, a single light guide plate is provided with a light emitting member for illuminating the light guide plate in a plurality of different directions, and a different effect display is possible depending on the direction of light received by the light guide plate. You may control so that only the light emitting member of the position which does not overlap is made to shine.

  In addition, the light guide plate effect using the light guide plate illustrated in FIGS. 4A and 4B displays characters and patterns such as “big hit” and “BONUS GET !!” to notify the occurrence of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different mode may be used. For example, a light guide plate effect using a light guide plate that displays characters and patterns such as “chance” and “extreme heat” may be performed during the change of the production pattern to indicate the expected degree of jackpot.

  Further, according to this embodiment, before the start condition is satisfied (in this example, at the time of starting winning), based on predetermined information (in this example, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the variation pattern type) It is determined in advance whether or not the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is the specific display result (big hit symbol). Based on the prefetch determination result, the hold notice effect is executed. In this case, when a new start prize is generated when a specific notice effect (in this example, a predetermined effect or a movable object notice effect) is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the pre-reading is performed. Regardless of the determination result, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted for the start winning until the specific notice effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the pre-reading determination process (see steps S1217A and S1217B) itself is executed when a new start prize is generated, and when a predetermined effect is being executed, If it is being executed, if a super reach effect is being executed, if there is a second reserved memory, or if a variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is displayed. Although the case where it restrict | limits was shown, you may comprise so that the process of the prefetch determination itself may be postponed and a reservation notice effect may be restrict | limited.

  In that case, it is determined whether or not a notice effect or a reach effect is being executed based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, and a specific notice effect (in this example, a predetermined effect or a movable object notice effect) or a specific reach is determined. When it is determined that the effect (in this example, the super reach effect) is being executed, when the second reserved memory is stored, or when the non-display control is being executed, the movable member 78 is moved. After the specific notice effect or specific reach effect is completed, or after the second hold memory is not stored, the non-display control is completed, and then the movable member 78 is moved. Based on the fact that a specific condition (in this example, digesting the hold memory and shifting the hold display) is established, a pre-reading determination is performed as to whether or not the display result of the variation display of the production symbol becomes the specific display result. To do. Therefore, by delaying the determination timing of the prefetch determination, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the pending notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect and the specific reach effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In this embodiment, in the case where the degree of expectation of the continuous effect varies depending on the number of holdings at the time of starting the pre-reading continuous notice effect, control is performed so that the continuous effect is not executed when the hold increases after setting the start timing of the continuous effect. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, on the effect control board 80 side, numerical data indicating each of the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect execution and the random value SR2 for the notice effect that are extracted from the random number circuit. Are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than SR1 and SR2 may be used in order to enhance the effect. The random value SR1 for determining the execution of the continuous effect is used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect according to the number of reserved memories when there is a reserved storage of the variation pattern of the super reach that is the target of the continuous effects. This is a random value to be used, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. SR2 is for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect when there is a pending storage of a variation pattern of super reach, which is a change pattern subject to the notice effect, regardless of whether or not the continuous effect is executed. This is a random value to be used, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a continuous effect execution determination table stored in the ROM 54 of the effect control board 80. This continuous effect execution determination table is a table used for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect based on the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect execution.

  In the continuous effect execution determination table, “Super” that is the target of the continuous effect so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 69 in the random value range 1 to 100 of the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect execution. In “Leach jackpot” and “Super-reaching”, “pending storage number 0” and “pending storage number 1” are values obtained by subtracting 1 from the holding memory number actually stored at the time when execution of continuous production is determined. Corresponding to each of “holding memory number 2” and “holding memory number 3”, determination values are set when the continuous effect is “executed” and when the continuous effect is “not executed”.

  Specifically, 10 determination values are assigned to “execute” and 90 determination values are assigned to “do not execute” as the determination values corresponding to “super reach big hit” in “holding memory count 0”. 40 determination values are assigned to “execute” and 60 determination values are assigned to “do not execute” as the determination values corresponding to “super reach loss” in “memory number 0”. As determination values corresponding to “Leach big hit”, 20 determination values are allocated to “execute” and 80 determination values are allocated to “do not execute”, and determination corresponding to “super reach loss” in “the number of reserved storage 1” As a value, 30 determination values are assigned to “execute”, and 70 determination values are assigned to “do not execute”. As determination values corresponding to “super reach big hit” in “reserved memory count 2” 30 decision values are assigned to “execute” and 70 decision values are assigned to “do not execute”, and 20 determination values corresponding to “superreach loss” in “reserved memory count 2” , 80 decision values are assigned to “do not execute”, and 40 decision values are assigned to “execute” and 60 do not execute as the decision values corresponding to “super reach big hit” in “pending storage count 3”. 10 decision values are assigned, and 10 decision values are assigned to “execute” and 90 decision values are assigned to “do not execute” as the decision values corresponding to “super-reaching loss” in “holding storage count 3”. Therefore, the possibility (expected degree) of being a big hit is set to be different according to the number of reserved memories when the continuous performance is executed.

  In this embodiment, as described later, since the timing at which the continuous production whose execution has been decided is actually executed is at the start of the next fluctuation, as described above, when the execution is decided, it is actually Execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is determined based on the stored storage number obtained by subtracting 1 from the stored stored memory number.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is determined using the continuous effect execution determination table set as described above, the continuous effect is executed in the state where the number of reserved memories is 0. The ratio of “big hit” during the continuous production when the continuous production is executed in the state of the number of stored storages (the expectation degree of the big hit) ) Is high, and when the continuous production is executed in the state of the number of stored memory 1, the continuous performance in the state of the number of held memory 2 is higher than the ratio (expected degree of big hit) during the continuous performance. When executed, the ratio of “big hit” during the continuous performance is high (expected degree of big hit), and when the continuous performance is executed in the state of the number of reserved memories 2, “big hit” is displayed during the continuous performance. The ratio When the continuous effect is executed in the state of the number of reserved memories 3, the ratio of “big hit” during the continuous effect (the big expectation) is higher than the expectation) (see FIG. 78 (a)). .

  In this way, the player with a large number of reserved memories has a higher expectation of being a “big hit” than the case with a small number of players. The game ball can be urged to continue to be launched in order to win the game ball at the start winning opening.

  In this embodiment, as described above, it corresponds to the number of reserved memories (0 to 3) at the time when the continuous notice is performed, which is the number of reserved memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of reserved memories at that time. Although an example in which the SR1 determination value is stored has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the SR1 determination value corresponds to the number of reserved storages corresponding to the time when a continuous notice is performed by subtracting one. Instead of the number of reserved memories (0 to 3), the number of reserved memories at that time is used, and the number of reserved memories when executing the determined continuous effect is subtracted from the number of reserved memories when determined. The determined continuous performance may be executed on condition that the stored number matches the reserved storage number.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a notice effect table stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, a notice effect table (for normal use) shown in FIG. 70 (a) and a notice effect table (for continuous effect use) shown in FIG. 70 (b) are prepared in advance as the notice effect tables. ing. The notice effect table (for normal use) is used together with whether or not to implement the notice effect that the character wearing the mask in the super reach that occurs when the continuous effect is not executed is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. FIG. 10 is a table that is referred to in order to determine, based on the random value SR2, whether the character mask is to be a white mask, a red mask, or a cherry pattern mask in implementation. The notice effect table (for continuous effects) is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the character wearing the mask in the super reach variation display subject to the notice of the continuous effects is being executed. In addition to whether or not to implement the notice effect displayed on the screen, it is referred to in order to determine whether the character mask is white mask, red mask or cherry blossom pattern mask based on the random number SR2. It is a table.

  In the notice effect table (for normal use), “1” to 100 in the random value range of the random value SR2 for the notice effect is set as the super reach type so that the determination value number shown in FIG. Not corresponding to "Super Reach" and "Super Reach", no notice effect, display character with white max, display character with red mask, or display character with cherry mask Judgment values are set for and.

  Specifically, as a judgment value corresponding to “super reach big hit”, 10 characters for the notice performance “not implemented”, 10 characters for the display of the “white mask” display, and the character of the “red mask” display 30 display values are assigned to the display of the character wearing the cherry blossom pattern mask, and 50 determination values are assigned to the display of the character wearing the “sakura pattern mask”. , 30 for the display of the character wearing the “white mask”, 20 for the display of the character wearing the “red mask”, and 10 determination values for the display of the character wearing the “sakura mask”. ing.

  Further, in the notice effect table (for continuous effect use), the super reach so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 70 (b) is within the random number range 1 to 100 of the random number SR2 for the notice effect. Corresponding to the types of “per super-reach” and “out of super-reach”, the notice effect is not implemented, the character with the white mask, the character with the red mask, or the cherry mask is covered. A judgment value is set for the display of the selected character.

  Specifically, the judgment value corresponding to “Super Reach Big Bonus” is 0 for the notice performance “not implemented”, 0 for the display of the character wearing the “white mask”, and the character wearing the “red mask” 10 judgment values are displayed, and 90 judgment values are assigned to the display of the character wearing the “sakura pattern mask”. The judgment value corresponding to “Super-reaching” is 0 for the “not implemented” notice effect. 0 for the display of the character wearing the “white mask”, 80 for the display of the character wearing the “red mask”, and 20 determination values for the display of the character wearing the “sakura mask”. ing.

  In this embodiment, the ratio that the super reach is a big hit (the big hit expectation) differs depending on the pattern of the mask covered by the character displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5 as the notice effect. . Specifically, when a character wearing a white mask is displayed on the display screen of the rendering device 5, the expectation of jackpot as the notice effect is the lowest, and the character wearing a cherry pattern mask on the display screen of the rendering device 5 Is displayed, the jackpot expectation degree as the notice effect is set to the highest (the jackpot expectation degree as the notice effect: cherry pattern mask> red mask> white mask).

  In other words, in this embodiment, the character of the character who has suffered the “non-execution” and “white mask” of the notice effect in both “super reach big hit” and “super reach loss” that occur when the continuous effect is not executed. The display, the display of the character wearing the “red mask”, and the display of the character wearing the “sakura mask” may all be selected, whereas “super reach big hit” during the continuous performance execution In both “super-reach off”, the implementation of the notice effect is always determined, and as the notice effect, the display of the character wearing the “red mask” and the display of the character wearing the “sakura mask” Since only the pattern is set to be selected, in the case of super reach that occurs during continuous production, the notice production is always However, the character with the “white mask” with the lowest expectation level is not displayed, and only the character with the “red mask” or the character with the “sakura mask” is displayed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be effectively increased.

  In the effect control process of this embodiment, a hold display update process and a continuous effect setting process are executed instead of the predetermined effect process and the hold notice effect process (1) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the hold display update processing. In the hold display update process of the present embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 first has “B100 (H)” data indicating the first start opening in the start opening winning designation data of the start winning reception command buffer. Based on the stored number, the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number) corresponding to the first start winning prize is specified (step S601C).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the hold display of the first hold memory number specified in step S601C in the first hold memory number display area 5D (step S602C). Specifically, if the number of the first reserved storage is one, one “◯” on-hold display is displayed on the first on-hold storage display unit 18c. If the number of the first hold storage is two, two hold indications of “◯” are displayed on the first hold storage display unit 18c. If the number of the first reserved storage is 3, three “◯” on-hold displays are displayed on the first on-hold storage display unit 18c. If the first number of reserved memories is four, four “◯” on-hold displays are displayed on the first on-hold storage display unit 18c.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the second based on the number of “B200 (H)” data indicating the second starting port stored in the starting port winning designation data of the start winning reception command buffer. A reserved memory number (second reserved memory number) corresponding to the start winning prize is specified (step S603C).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the second hold memory display unit 18d to display the hold display of the second hold memory number specified in step S603C (step S604C). Specifically, if the number of second reserved memories is one, one “●” on-hold display is displayed on the second on-hold storage display portion 18d. If the second number of reserved memories is two, two “●” on-hold displays are displayed on the second on-hold storage display unit 18d. If the number of the second reserved memory is 3, three “●” on-hold displays are displayed on the second on-hold storage display unit 18d. If the second number of reserved storage is four, four “●” on-hold displays are displayed on the second on-hold storage display unit 18d.

  Next, after executing the processing of step S604C, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the start winning reception command buffer and is set to “1” indicating that the start winning command could not be received satisfactorily. It is determined whether there is undecided information (step S605C). If the undetermined information set to “1” is present in the start winning reception command buffer (step S605C; Yes), the presentation control microcomputer 100 refers to a predetermined area of the RAM, and determines the pre-reading notice restriction flag. Whether or not is set is determined (step S606C). When the prefetch notice restriction flag is set (step S606C; Yes), the hold display update process is terminated, and when the prefetch notice restriction flag is not set (step S606C; No), the prefetching is performed in a predetermined area of the RAM. A notice restriction flag is set (step S607C), and the hold display update process is terminated.

  If there is no undetermined information set to “1” (step S605C; No), the production control microcomputer 100 refers to a predetermined area of the RAM and determines whether or not the prefetch notice restriction flag is set. Is determined (step S608C). When the prefetch notice restriction flag is not set (step S608C; No), the hold display update process is terminated, and when the prefetch notice restriction flag is set (step S608C; Yes), the prefetching is performed in a predetermined area of the RAM. A notice restriction flag is set (step S609C), and the hold display update process is terminated.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the continuous performance setting process. In the continuous effect setting process of the present embodiment, first, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer, and so on, from the main board 31 transmitted via the relay board 77. It is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S890). If the received command is the first reserved memory number notification command (step S890; Yes), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the first reserved memory number notification command indicates an increase in the first reserved memory number. Is determined (step S891). If the first reserved memory number notification command indicates a decrease in the first reserved memory number (step S891; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and the first reserved memory number notification command increases the first reserved memory number. (Step S891; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low base state (step S892). If the current gaming state is not the low base state (step S892; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command (step S890; No), the production control microcomputer 100 further receives the first received command from the main board 31 transmitted via the relay board 77. It is determined whether or not it is a 2 pending storage count notification command (step S893). If the received command is not the second reserved memory number notification command (step S893; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and if the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S893; Yes), the second It is determined whether or not the pending storage count notification command indicates an increase in the second pending storage count (step S894). If the second reserved memory number notification command indicates a decrease in the second reserved memory number (step S894; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and the second reserved memory number notification command increases the second reserved memory number. (Step S894; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (step S895). If the current gaming state is not the high base state (step S895; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the execution of the continuous effect may be determined by performing the processing after step S900 on the condition that the first reserved memory is increased. In the low base state, when the second reserved memory increases, the execution of the continuous effect is not determined by not proceeding to the processing after step S900. Also, in the high base state, execution of continuous production may be determined by performing the processing after step S900 on the condition that the second reserved memory has increased, whereas in the high base state, When the first reserved memory increases, the execution of the continuous effect is not determined by not proceeding to the processing after step S900. That is, in the low base state, the first reserved memory is a subject of continuous notice, and in the high base state, the second reserved memory is a subject of continuous notice.

  If the current gaming state is the low base state in step S892 (step S892; Yes), or if the current gaming state is the high base state in step S895 (step S895; Yes), it is for effect control. The microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S900 and determines whether or not the prefetching notice restriction in which the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted is being performed. Whether or not the prefetching notice restriction is in effect may be determined based on whether or not the prefetching notice restriction flag set in step S607 is set.

  If the pre-reading notice restriction is being restricted (step S900; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading notice restriction is not being restricted (step S900; No), the predetermined effect in the RAM 122 is referred to and the continuous effect is set. It is determined whether the in-execution flag is set (step S901).

  When the continuous effect execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S901; Yes), the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the continuous effect setting process and is executing the continuous effect in the predetermined area of the RAM. When the flag is not set (step S901; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect determination flag is set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM (step S902).

  When the continuous effect determination flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S902; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and when the continuous effect determination flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM ( Step S902; No), the production control microcomputer 100 further refers to a predetermined area of the RAM and determines whether or not the continuous production execution restriction flag is set. If the continuous effect execution restriction flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S903; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and the continuous effect execution restriction flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM. (Step S903; No), referring to the variable category command stored in the start winning received command buffer, if it is determined in step S892 that it is a low base, the continuous effect is stored in the hold memory of the first hold memory. It is determined whether or not there is a super-reserved storage of the super-reach, and if it is determined in step S895 that it is a high base, the super-reserved storage that is the target of continuous production is stored in the second stored storage. It is determined whether or not there is a memory (step S904).

  If there is no super reach hold memory (step S904; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated. If there is super reach hold memory (step S904; Yes), a random number circuit or an effect control counter setting unit is set. The random number SR1 for determining the continuous performance execution is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random counter, and the number of reserved storages of the type determined as having super-reserved storage in step S904 (first The execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is performed based on the SR1 determination value stored in the continuous effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 69 in association with the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the stored value or the second stored value). It is determined (step S905), and it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905 (step S9). 6).

  When it is determined in step S905 that execution of continuous production is determined (step S906; Yes), a continuous production determination flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S907), and super reach is performed in the predetermined area of the RAM in step S904. A value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of held memories (the first held memory number or the second held memory number) of the type determined to have the reserved memory is stored as the continuous effect execution reserved memory number (step S908). The process ends. Note that the data of the continuous production execution hold memory number includes information on whether the target of the continuous production execution hold memory number is the first hold memory number or the second hold memory number.

  If it is determined in step S905 that continuous performance is not executed (step S906; No), a continuous performance execution restriction flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S910), and the continuous performance setting process is terminated. In this way, by setting the continuous performance execution restriction flag as a set, the ratio of the execution of the continuous performance is determined by repeatedly executing the continuous continuous performance determination process every time an interruption is made. It can be prevented that the ratio is different from the ratio set in the determination table.

  In the present embodiment, in step S904, it is determined whether or not there is a super reach hold memory that is a target of continuous production in the first hold memory or the second hold memory. In step S910, a continuous performance execution restriction flag is set in step S910 so that the determination of whether or not the repeated continuous performance is performed is not performed for the super-reach hold storage. In step S903, whether or not the continuous performance execution restriction flag is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination target in step S904 may be only the increased first hold memory or second hold memory. In some cases, it is determined whether or not to repeatedly perform continuous production for the same super reach hold memory Since there is no be, it may be the processing of the processing and the step S910 in step S903 not to performed. In this case, step S599 +, which will be described later, which resets the continuous performance execution restriction flag is not performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S905, execution of continuous production is determined on the condition that there is a super-reserved hold memory subject to continuous notice, but the present invention is not limited to this. In step S905, it is determined whether or not there is a pending notice of a fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit. If there is a pending notice of a fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit, the fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit. The continuous production may be determined at a higher rate as compared with the case where there is no reservation notice.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect symbol variation start process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, after performing the process of step S8002, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the continuous production determination flag is set by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM (step S8002A). . When the continuous production determination flag is set (step 8002A; Yes), the number of the stored storages of the type specified from the continuous production execution holding storage number stored in step S908 described above (the first holding memory number or the first holding memory number). It is determined whether or not (2 on-hold storage count) is the same as the number stored as the continuous effect execution hold storage count (step 8002B). That is, after the execution of the continuous effect is determined, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) of the type that is the target of the continuous effect has increased.

  If they are the same in step S904 (step S8002B; Yes), the background image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a continuous effect background image (the night background image shown in FIG. 75E). At the same time (step S8002C), a continuous effect execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S8002D).

  After executing the process of step S8002D, or when it is determined in step S8002B that they are not the same (step S8002B; No), the continuous effect determination flag and the number of continuous effect execution pending storages stored in the predetermined area of the RAM Are reset (step S8002E), and the process proceeds to step S8003. Subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that they are not the same in step S8002B, the next interruption is performed by resetting the continuous effect determination flag and the number of continuous effect execution hold memories in the process of step S8002E. In the continuous effect setting process after the start of the variable display that is performed when the occurrence of the event, the process proceeds to step S905 again based on the fact that the continuous effect determination flag is reset, and execution of the continuous effect is determined. There is. In this way, when the execution of the continuous effect is decided again, the next change is made on the condition that there is no change in the number of reserved memories of the type that is the target of the continuous effect until the start of the next change display. A continuous effect is executed at the start of display.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect symbol changing process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the effect symbol changing process, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the end code is read in step S8105A (step S8105A). .

  If the end code is not read in step S8105A (step S8105A; No), display control is performed based on display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data included in the presentation control execution data. Setting for sending the display control command designated by the data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and sending the sound effect signal corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data to the voice control board 13. , A setting for sending an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14, and a predetermined instruction operation (for example, pressing) on the player's stick controller and push button based on the operation detection control data Operation) is effectively detected, and the production operation can be switched according to the detection result. Run the attraction control command processing of performing constant terminates in performance symbol variation processing.

  If the end code has been read (step S8105A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern corresponding to the effect control pattern is a super reach that is a target of continuous notice (step S8105B). If the variation pattern is not super-reach, the process proceeds to step S8105G. If the variation pattern is super-reach (step S8105B; Yes), the predetermined area in the RAM is referred to and the continuous effect execution flag is set. It is determined whether or not (step S8105C). When the continuous production execution flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8105G. When the continuous production execution flag is set, the production control CPU 120 resets the continuous production execution flag ( In step S8105D, the background displayed on the display screen is changed to a normal background image (step S8105E).

  In step S8105G, the production control microcomputer 100 hits a predetermined area of the RAM, sets a start designation command reception waiting time, and resets the continuous production execution restriction flag (step S8105H). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S8116), and the effect process during effect symbol variation ends.

  Next, the aspect of the continuous effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the display screen of the effect display device 9 shows a state where the effect symbols are derived and displayed in combinations that cause the effects to be out of sync. In the first hold memory display portion 18c in the display area of the effect display device 9, four hold memories generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing through the first start winning opening are displayed. In addition, the second hold memory display unit 18d in the display area of the effect display device 9 does not display the hold memory generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing through the second start winning opening, that is, 0 state. In addition, in the background image currently displayed on the display screen of the production | presentation display apparatus 9 at this time, it has shown that it is daytime because the sun is displayed.

  When the hold storage displayed in the first hold storage display unit 18c is input from the state shown in FIG. 75A, two fluctuation displays are executed as shown in FIG. 75B. Occasionally, when a start winning is generated at the first start winning opening, as shown in FIG. 75C, a new reserved memory is displayed at the last part of the first reserved memory display unit 18c. At this time, it is determined that the hold memory by the start winning at the first start winning opening becomes a big hit or miss by executing the super reach as the target holding of the continuous performance in this embodiment, and further, to the first starting winning opening. If no start winning to the new first start winning opening is generated after the storage by the start winning of the next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D) and FIG. 75 (E), the change display by the next holding storage is started. After that, the background image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5 is switched to an image indicating that it is night as a continuous effect. The background image at this time can be determined to be night by displaying the moon.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 75 (F) and 75 (G), after the change display in which the background image is switched and the change display of the next hold memory are finished, the hold storage as the production target of the continuous effect is completed. When the variable display is executed, a character wearing a “red mask” or a “sakura mask” is displayed on the display screen as a notice effect (in this embodiment, a character wearing a cherry mask is displayed). Thereafter, the super reach is executed and the jackpot or loss occurs.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the effect symbols are derived and displayed as combinations that are out of place, and four reserved memories are displayed on the first reserved memory display portion 18c. As shown in FIG. 76 (C), the last part of the first reserved storage display section 18c is displayed by executing the two fluctuation display as shown in FIG. A new reserved memory is displayed. It is determined that the hold memory by the start winning at this time is a big hit or a loss as a result of super reach as a target for continuous production in this embodiment, and as shown in FIG. When the hold memory is further displayed by newly making a start prize at the first start prize opening later, as shown in FIGS. 76 (E) and 76 (F), the hold display is digested to change. Even if the display is executed, the background image is not switched from an image indicating the daytime to an image indicating the nighttime as a continuous effect as shown in FIG.

  As described above, since the continuous production determination flag and the number of continuous production execution hold memories are reset when the continuous production is not executed, in this embodiment, super reach is executed as a target hold of the continuous production and the big hit Alternatively, the execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is determined again for the hold storage determined to be out of place. When it is determined that the continuous production is to be executed, if there is no start winning to the new first starting winning opening as shown in FIGS. 76 (C) and 76 (D), it is displayed in the next variation display. The background image of the screen is switched to a background image showing a continuous effect as shown in FIG.

  In the case in this case, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), when the variable display of the hold memory as the effect of the continuous effect is executed, “white mask”, “red mask” as the notice effect on the display screen. Alternatively, a character wearing a “sakura pattern mask” is displayed (in the present embodiment, an example in which a character wearing a white mask is displayed), and thereafter, super reach is executed and a big hit or loss occurs. In this way, if there is a further start prize after the start of the stored memory as the target of the continuous production, the further change is made after the start of the stored memory as the target of the continuous production shown in FIG. In the example shown, the notice effect by the character wearing the mask is executed as in the case where the start winning prize is not made. However, in this case, since the continuous effect is not executed, the mask is applied as the notice effect. Character display may not be executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the first hold memory display unit 18c displays the hold memory in which the winning to the first start winning opening is made, and the second hold memory. Although the display unit 18d has described the aspect of the continuous effect and the notice effect in the state where the reserved memory in which the winning to the second start winning opening is made is 0, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, When the hold storage is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 18d, the hold storage displayed on the second hold storage display unit 18d is more than the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 18c. The change is executed with priority. At this time, when the reserved memory displayed on the second reserved memory display unit 18d has a reserved memory that is a target of continuous production, which is a big hit or lost when super reach is executed, the first reserved memory display In the on-hold storage displayed in the part 18c, the continuous effect and the notice effect in the same mode as the continuous effect and the notice effect performed in FIGS. 75 and 76 are executed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the number of reserved memories at the time when the notice effect is started, not the number of notice effects, and the hold viewed from the player. It can be avoided that the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit according to the number of memories does not match the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit in advance for the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, since the super reach is executed when the notice effect is executed, the expectation that becomes a big hit can be further improved, and the interest of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to avoid the display of the character wearing the white mask, which is the mode with the lowest percentage of the big hit, so the display of the character wearing the white mask is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming a big hit from being able to improve the expectation of the player, so that the expectation of being a big hit can be improved accurately, and the interest of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, since the percentage of big hits increases as the number of reserved memories increases, motivation to play a game with a large number of reserved memories can be given to the player, so participation in the game is promoted. Therefore, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to prevent the announcement effect from being determined based on information with low credibility that is not based on determination by execution of the award random number determination process.

  The embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

  For example, in step S904 in the continuous performance setting process, the variable category command stored in the reception command buffer at the start winning prize is referred to, and the first reserved memory is continuously stored during the low base and the second reserved memory is continuously stored during the high base. It is determined whether or not there is a super-reserved hold memory that is the target of production. If there is a super-reach hold memory in the first hold memory in the low base, the first hold memory number is set regardless of the second hold memory number. Continuous execution / non-execution is determined as the target, and if there is a super reach hold memory in the second hold memory in the high base, the continuous effect is applied to the second hold memory number regardless of the first hold memory number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in order to easily determine the type of reserved storage that is the target of continuous production, Conditions on 2 hold stored number or as a condition for determining a continuous effect in the low base in, or may be a condition related to the first pending memory number as a condition for determining the continuous effect at high base in.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77, after executing the processing of step S903 (step S903; No), first, the current gaming state is specified (step S904A), and the current gaming state is in the high base state. It is determined whether or not there is (step S904B). If the skill state is the high base state (step S904B; Yes), the process proceeds to step S904D. If the current game state is not the high base state (step S904B; No), the process proceeds to step S904C. In step S904C, it is determined whether the second reserved storage number is 0 (step S904C). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S904C; Yes), the process proceeds to step S905. If the second reserved memory number is not 0 (step S904C; No), the process proceeds to step S904E.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S904B that the current gaming state is the high base state, in step S904D, it is determined whether or not the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S904D). If the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S904D; Yes), the process proceeds to step S905. If the first reserved memory number is not 4 (step S904D; No), the process proceeds to step 904E.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S904C; Yes) in step S904C, or the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S904D; Yes) in step S904D, a random number circuit and an effect control counter are set in step S905. The random number value SR1 for determining the continuous performance execution is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the unit, and when the gaming state specified in step S904B is the high base state, the second reserved memory A value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number, and when the gaming state identified in step S904B is in the low base state, the continuous effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 22 in association with the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory number The execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is determined based on the SR1 determination value stored in the Flop S905), it determines whether or not the continuous effect execution is determined in step S905 (step S906).

  When execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905 (step S906; Yes), a continuous effect determination flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S907), and non-execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905. In that case (step S906; No), the process proceeds to step S910.

  Further, if the second reserved memory number is not 0 in step 904C (step S904C; No), or if the first reserved memory number is not 4 in step S904D (step S904D; No), the process continues in step 904E. Determine non-execution of production. Furthermore, when execution of continuous production is determined in step S905 (step S906; No), or after execution of processing in step S904, a continuous production execution restriction flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S910). The continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  That is, in this modified example, execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905 based on the first reserved memory number only when the gaming state is the low base state and the second reserved memory number is zero. Thus, when deciding whether or not to execute a continuous effect, whether there is a second reserved memory or not, whether a continuous effect based on the number of reserved memories of the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory has been determined. It can be suppressed that the player becomes difficult to discriminate. Similarly, the execution / non-execution of the continuous effect is determined based on the second reserved memory number in step S905 only when the gaming state is the high base state and the first reserved memory number is 4. When deciding whether or not to execute the continuous performance, the game determines which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is the target of the continuous performance because the first reserved memory number is 0 to 3. It can be suppressed that the person becomes difficult to distinguish. In addition, when the continuous production is determined in this way, at the time of the low base, when the second reserved memory number increases until the determined continuous production is executed, the determined continuous production is displayed. You can stop it.

  In the above-described modification, it is determined whether the second reserved memory number is 0 (when the base is low) or the first reserved memory number is 4 (when the base is high) when determining the continuous performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second reserved memory number is 0 (low base time) and the first reserved memory number is 4 (high base time) at the time of determining the continuous performance. Even if there is not, the execution of the continuous effect is determined, and when the determined continuous effect is executed, the second reserved memory number is 0 (low base time) and the first reserved memory number is 4 (high base time). You may make it perform a continuous production on the condition.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the line graph showing the relationship between each special figure reserved memory number and the big hit expectation degree in FIG. 78A, the big hit expectation that becomes a big hit in the continuous performance as the reserved memory number increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the number of reserved storages is set. Is a big hit expectation level that is a big hit in continuous production with a large number of hold memory numbers of 3 and a big hit expectation level that is a big hit when the number of hold memory numbers is 0 and the hold memory number is low. It may be set so that the big hit expectation degree that becomes a big hit in a state where there are two is high (a line graph shows a mountain shape that protrudes upward at each special figure holding memory number 2 location), or This is shown in Fig. 78 (c) In addition, the big hit expectation degree that is a big hit in a continuous performance in a state where the number of hold memories is three and the number of hold memories is large, and the big hit expectation degree that becomes a big hit when the number of hold memories is zero and the number of hold memories is small However, in the state where the number of reserved memories is two, the big hit expectation degree that becomes a big hit may be set to be low (a valley shape in which a line graph protrudes downward at each special figure reserved memory number 2 location) Furthermore, it may be set so that the degree of big hit expectation, which is a big hit in the continuous performance, decreases as the number of reserved memories increases (the line graph shows a downward-sloping shape).

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the background image currently displayed on the display screen is changed to the image which shows the night from the image which shows daytime, it is set as the continuous effect, However, this invention is not limited to this, Continuous effect As an aspect of the above, not only the switching of the background image but also the switching of the sound pattern emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9, or a combination thereof may be used.

  In the embodiment, the character wearing the mask is displayed on the display screen as the notice effect, and the expectation degree of the big hit is suggested by the pattern of the mask. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is provided. For example, the expected degree of big hit may be suggested by the background image displayed on the display screen or the color or pattern of characters or the like displayed on the display screen.

  Moreover, in the said Example, execution of a continuous effect is determined irrespective of the determination result at the time of winning of the storage memory in which a variable display is implemented before the storage storage of the super reach used as the object of a continuous effect in the said Example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a reserved storage of super reach that is the target of these continuous effects, and a variable display is performed before the stored storage of the super reach. On the condition that the judgment result at the time of winning of the reserved memory is not a fluctuation in which special effects such as normal reach, super reach, pseudo-ream and slip are implemented, continuous production is started. Before the change of super reach, which is the target of continuous production, is performed, for example, special production such as normal reach and pseudo-ream, etc. It is possible to prevent If it is Marurichi or quasi continuous player erroneously recognized, may be able to secure the continuity of the beginning and continuous effect and subject to fluctuations in the continuous effect.

  Further, as a modification of this embodiment, the number of hold information increases by the timing of executing the notice effect after the hold information of the super reach that is the subject of the notice is stored and the execution of the continuous notice is determined. When it has been performed (for example, when No in step S540), the execution of the determined notice effect or the timing for executing the notice effect may be modified.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the effect symbol variation start process, when it is determined that they are not the same in step S8002B (step S8002B; No), the continuous effect execution pending storage number stored in step S908 described above is set. 2 is determined (step S8002F). If the continuous effect execution hold storage number is 2 (step S8002F; Yes), the process proceeds to step S8002G. If the continuous effect execution hold storage number is not 2 (step S8002F; No), the process proceeds to step S8002I. Then, in step S8002G, the number of reserved memories of the type (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) specified from the continuous effect execution reserved memory number stored in step S908 described above, and the continuous effect execution reserved memory A difference from the number stored as a number is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the difference is 1 (step S8002G). If the difference is 1 (step S8002G; Yes), the process proceeds to step S8002H. If the difference is not 1 (2) (step S8002G; No), the process proceeds to step S8002I.

  In step S8002H, the continuous production determination flag and the number of continuous production execution hold memories are reset in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the next hold storage variable display of the hold storage that has been determined to execute the original continuous production has been determined. The execution of the continuous effect is determined at the time of the variable display, and the process proceeds to step S8003. Further, in step S8002I, the number of reserved memories (the number of first reserved memories or the number of second reserved memories) is held until the variable display of the reserved memories for which execution of the original continuous effects has been determined is executed. It is determined that the number is not the same as the stored number, and the execution of the continuous effect is corrected by resetting the continuous effect determination flag and the continuous effect execution hold storage number from a predetermined area of the RAM, and in step S8002J, the continuous effect execution limit By setting the flag, the resetting of the continuous performance is prevented and the process proceeds to step S8003.

  In the present embodiment, since the period from when 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved memories due to the start of variable display until the determination in step S8002B is performed is extremely short, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories does not increase during this period. In step S8002F, it is determined whether or not the continuous production execution hold memory number is 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, 1 is subtracted from the hold memory number due to the start of variable display. If it is considered that the new hold memory increases during the period from when the determination is made to step S8002B, whether or not the number of continuous effect execution hold memories is 2 or 3 in step S8002F. If the number of continuous production execution suspensions is 3, the answer is “Yes” in step S8002G. The re-setting of the 002H may be carried.

  In this embodiment, the continuous production determination flag and the number of continuous production execution hold memories are reset (reset) in a predetermined area of the RAM in step S8002H. However, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the continuous effect determination flag and the continuous effect execution hold storage number that are already set in a predetermined area of the RAM may be maintained without performing the process of step S8002H.

  Further, as a modification of this embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous effect may be varied depending on the number of reserved memories when it is determined that there is a big hit in the reserved memory at the start of fluctuation. .

  For example, the continuous production setting process is omitted in the production control process. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, in the effect symbol variation start process, after executing the process of step S8002, in step S8002K, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect, and the determined continuous effect is set. The continuous production setting process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous production is determined in step S8002K (step S8002L). If execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S8002K (step S8002L; Yes), the process proceeds to step S8002C. If non-execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S8002K (step S8002L; No), step S8003 is performed. Proceed to

  In step S8002C, the background image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to the continuous effect background image (the night background image shown in FIG. 75E), and the continuous effect is being executed in a predetermined area of the RAM. A flag is set (step S8002D). After executing the process of step S8002D, the process proceeds to step S530.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the continuous performance setting process. In the continuous effect setting process in the modified example, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display to be performed is the variation display of the second reserved memory (step S890). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the variation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second. It is determined whether or not it is “2” indicating that it is a variable display based on the hold storage. If the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2” (step S890; Yes), the process proceeds to step S891, and if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” (step S890; No), the process advances to step 892.

  In step S891, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state. If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S891; Yes), the process proceeds to step S900. If the current gaming state is not the high base state (step S891; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  In step S892, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low base state. If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S892; Yes), the process proceeds to step S900. If the current gaming state is not the low base state (step S892; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  Therefore, in this modified example, in the low base state, the execution of the continuous effect is determined by performing the processing after step S900 on the condition that the variation display to be performed is the variation display based on the first reserved memory. On the other hand, the execution of the continuous effect is not determined by not performing the processing after step S900 on the condition that the variation display to be performed is the variation display based on the second reserved storage. . In the high base state, the execution of the continuous effect may be determined by performing the processing from step S900 on condition that the variation display to be performed is the variation display based on the second reserved storage. On the other hand, the execution of the continuous effect is not determined by not performing the processes after step S900 on the condition that the variation display to be performed is the variation display based on the first reserved storage. That is, in the low base state, the first reserved memory is a subject of continuous notice, and in the high base state, the second reserved memory is a subject of continuous notice.

  In step S900, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice restriction in which execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted is being restricted. Whether or not the prefetching notice restriction is in effect may be determined based on whether or not the prefetching notice restriction flag set in step S607 is set.

  If the pre-reading notice restriction is being restricted (step S900; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading notice restriction is not being restricted (step S900; No), the predetermined effect in the RAM is referred to and the continuous effect setting is made. It is determined whether the in-execution flag is set (step S901).

  When the continuous effect execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S901; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and the continuous effect execution flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. (Step S901; No), with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance execution restriction flag is set (Step S903). If the continuous effect execution restriction flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S903; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and the continuous effect execution restriction flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM. (Step S903; No), referring to the variable category command stored in the start winning received command buffer, if it is determined in step S892 that it is a low base, the continuous effect is stored in the hold memory of the first hold memory. It is determined whether or not there is a super-reserved storage of the super-reach, and if it is determined in step S895 that it is a high base, the super-reserved storage that is the target of continuous production is stored in the second stored storage. It is determined whether or not there is a memory (step S904).

  If there is no super reach hold memory (step S904; No), the continuous effect setting process is terminated. If there is super reach hold memory (step S904; Yes), the random number circuit 124 and the effect control counter are set. From the numerical data updated by the random counter of the unit 193, the random number SR1 for determining the execution of continuous effects is extracted, and the number of reserved memories of the type determined to have a super-reach reserved memory in step S904 ( Execution / non-execution of continuous effect based on the determination value of SR1 stored in the continuous effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 22 in association with a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number). The execution is determined (step S905), and it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905 (step S905). Step S906).

  If execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905 (step S906; Yes), the continuous effect setting process is terminated, and if non-execution of the continuous effect is determined in step S905 (step S906; No). Then, a continuous effect execution restriction flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S910), and the continuous effect setting process is terminated. In this way, by setting the continuous performance execution restriction flag as a set, the ratio of the execution of the continuous performance is determined by repeatedly executing the continuous continuous performance determination process every time an interruption is made. It can be prevented that the ratio is different from the ratio set in the determination table.

  In the present embodiment, in step S904, it is determined whether or not there is a super reach hold memory that is a target of continuous production in the first hold memory or the second hold memory. In step S910, a continuous performance execution restriction flag is set in step S910 so that the determination of whether or not the repeated continuous performance is performed is not performed for the super-reach hold storage. In step S903, whether or not the continuous performance execution restriction flag is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination target in step S904 may be only the increased first hold memory or second hold memory. In some cases, it is determined whether or not to repeatedly perform continuous production for the same super reach hold memory Since there is no be, it may be the processing of the processing and the step S910 in step S903 not to performed. In this case, step S599 +, which will be described later, which resets the continuous performance execution restriction flag is not performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S905, execution of continuous production is determined on the condition that there is a super-reserved hold memory subject to continuous notice, but the present invention is not limited to this. In step S905, it is determined whether or not there is a pending notice of a fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit. If there is a pending notice of a fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit, the fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit. The continuous production may be determined at a higher rate as compared with the case where there is no reservation notice.

  In each of the above embodiments, the example in which the light guide plate effect is controlled so as not to overlap with the fourth symbol, the operation instruction display, the abnormality display, and the like has been described. You may make it control a light-guide plate effect so that it may not overlap with a code | cord | chord, a special image (an image with few opportunities to be displayed, and a rare value is high), etc.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function based on a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function based on a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In addition, the configuration for executing the continuous notice effect and the hold notice effect as the predetermined notice effect shown in each of the above embodiments can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to various forms of gaming machines. For example, the configuration for executing the continuous notice effect and the hold notice effect shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a sealed circulation pachinko machine. In the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in an enclosed area (for example, in a pachinko machine), and the game area provided in the pachinko machine In order to fire game balls through the game area, collect the game balls via the collection unit (for example, each winning opening, out port, foul ball return opening), and fire the collected game balls again into the game area In the enclosed area. In addition, in such a sealed circulation pachinko machine, when there is a prize at each prize opening, points corresponding to the number of prize balls are added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the prize balls. Processing is performed. In such an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is applied, and when a presentation symbol variation display is performed on the production display device of the enclosed circulation pachinko machine, a holding notice effect is executed. When the predetermined effect is being executed, or when the movable object notice effect is being executed, the super reach effect is being executed. In this case, when there is the second reserved memory, or when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the hold notice effect may not be started immediately, and the hold notice effect may be limited.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example in which the variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, each of a plurality of gaming media can pass through a first starting area and a second starting area at the same time. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through at least one of the first start area and the second start area, a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, the display result is derived and displayed, and the display result is determined in advance. The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the displayed specific display result is derived and displayed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Effect display device 9a 1st reserved memory display part 9b 2nd reserved memory display part 9c, 9d 4th symbol display area 9F Predetermined effect execution area 13 First start winning opening 14 Second starting winning opening 20 Special variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 Movable member 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

It is advantageous for the player when a specific display result predetermined as the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display means for variably displaying each type of identification information that can be identified and displaying the display result. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state,
At least a part of the specific area on the front side of the variable display means is arranged at a position overlapping the identification information, and includes an effect display means for performing a predetermined effect display,
The identification information is visible through the specific area in the effect display means,
The gaming machine characterized in that the presentation display means restricts execution of the presentation display in the specific area at least when the variable display means performs variable display.

Images